]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texi
[gdb] Fix missing symtab includes
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
b3adc24a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
abf874aa
CL
462@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
463@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
465fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
466section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
467error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
468several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
469section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
470sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
471
472@smallexample
473 MEMORY @{
474 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
475 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
476 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 @}
478 SECTIONS @{
479 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
480 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
481 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 @}
483
484 with input sections:
485 .data.1: size 8
486 .data.2: size 0x10
487 .data.3: size 4
488
489 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
490 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
491@end smallexample
492
493This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
494the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
495
496@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
497@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498This option enables warnings when
499@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
500matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
501discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
502output region.
503
252b5132
RH
504@cindex entry point, from command line
505@kindex -e @var{entry}
506@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 507@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
508@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
509Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
510program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
511named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
512and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
513base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
514@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
515and other ways of specifying the entry point.
516
b58f81ae
DJ
517@kindex --exclude-libs
518@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
519Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 520exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
521@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
522automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
523port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
524explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
525option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
526be treated as hidden.
527
e1c37eb5
DK
528@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
529@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
530Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
531should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
532into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
533may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
534used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
535the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
536match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
537command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
538of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
539regardless of this option.
540
252b5132
RH
541@cindex dynamic symbol table
542@kindex -E
543@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 544@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
545@item -E
546@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
547@itemx --no-export-dynamic
548When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
549option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
550all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
551set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
552
553If you do not use either of these options (or use the
554@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
555dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
556referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
557
558If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
559back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
560dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
561linking the program itself.
562
55255dae 563You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 564be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 565See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 566
8b747e1a
DK
567Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
568support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
569the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
570
36f63dca 571@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
572@cindex big-endian objects
573@cindex endianness
574@kindex -EB
575@item -EB
576Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
577
578@cindex little-endian objects
579@kindex -EL
580@item -EL
581Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 582@end ifclear
252b5132 583
2509a395
SL
584@kindex -f @var{name}
585@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
586@item -f @var{name}
587@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
588When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
589to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
590table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
591symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
595the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
596first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
597@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
598in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
599Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
600implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 601machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
602
603This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
604will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
605
2509a395
SL
606@kindex -F @var{name}
607@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 608@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 609@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
610When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
611the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
612of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
613on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
614
615If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
616run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
617dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
618filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
619found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
620used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
621@var{name}.
622
ff5dcc92 623Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 624toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
625object files.
626@ifclear SingleFormat
627The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 628@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 629@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
630environment variable.
631@end ifclear
632The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
633creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 634
3dbf70a2 635@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
636@kindex -fini=@var{name}
637@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
638When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
639executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
640address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
641the function to call.
642
252b5132
RH
643@kindex -g
644@item -g
645Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
646
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -G @var{value}
648@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 649@cindex object size
2509a395 650@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
651@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
652Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
653@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 654MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
655sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
656
657@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 658@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 659@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 660@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
661@itemx -soname=@var{name}
662When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
663the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
664which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
665linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
666field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
667
668@kindex -i
669@cindex incremental link
670@item -i
671Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
672
3dbf70a2 673@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
674@kindex -init=@var{name}
675@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
676When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
677executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
678of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
679function to call.
680
252b5132 681@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 682@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 683@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 684@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
685@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
686Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
687list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
688If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 689will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 690will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 691
ff5dcc92 692On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
693files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
694and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
695called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
696@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
697indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
698to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
699@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
700
701The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
702specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
703was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
704command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
705archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
706the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
707
ff5dcc92 708See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
709archives multiple times.
710
711You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
712
713@ifset GENERIC
714This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 715if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
716behaviour of the AIX linker.
717@end ifset
718
719@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 720@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 721@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 722@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 723@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
724Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
725for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
726option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
727in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
728on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 729@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
730order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
731how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
732option is specified.
252b5132 733
3aa2d05a
NC
734If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
735prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
736@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 737
252b5132
RH
738@ifset UsesEnvVars
739The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 740@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
741some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
742@end ifset
743
744The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
745@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
746at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
747
748@cindex emulation
749@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 750@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
751Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
752emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
753
754If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
755@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
756
757Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
758configured.
759
760@cindex link map
761@kindex -M
762@kindex --print-map
763@item -M
764@itemx --print-map
765Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
766information about the link, including the following:
767
768@itemize @bullet
769@item
3b83e13a 770Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
771@item
772How common symbols are allocated.
773@item
774All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
775which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
776@item
777The values assigned to symbols.
778
779Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
780involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
781have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
782linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
783of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
784the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
785linker script containing:
786
787@smallexample
788 foo = 1
789 foo = foo * 4
790 foo = foo + 8
791@end smallexample
792
793will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
794option is used:
795
796@smallexample
797 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
798 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
800@end smallexample
801
802See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
803scripts.
d2ef37eb 804
06ddcada
AM
805@item
806How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 807
06ddcada
AM
808When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
809.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
810These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
811
812@smallexample
813Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
814@end smallexample
815
06ddcada 816This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
817merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
818is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
819
820@smallexample
06ddcada 821Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
822@end smallexample
823
06ddcada 824This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
825when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
826is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
827@end itemize
828
035801ce
FS
829@cindex link map discarded
830@kindex --print-map-discarded
831@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
832@item --print-map-discarded
833@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
834Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
835in the link map. Enabled by default.
836
252b5132
RH
837@kindex -n
838@cindex read-only text
839@cindex NMAGIC
840@kindex --nmagic
841@item -n
842@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
843Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
844libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
845mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
846
847@kindex -N
848@kindex --omagic
849@cindex read/write from cmd line
850@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 851@item -N
252b5132
RH
852@itemx --omagic
853Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
854not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
855libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
856mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
857is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
858specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
859
860@kindex --no-omagic
861@cindex OMAGIC
862@item --no-omagic
863This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
864sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
865be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
866shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
867
868@kindex -o @var{output}
869@kindex --output=@var{output}
870@cindex naming the output file
871@item -o @var{output}
872@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 873Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
874option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
875script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
876
877@kindex -O @var{level}
878@cindex generating optimized output
879@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 880If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 881the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
882should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
883option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
884the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
885no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
886of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 887
387dd777
DP
888@kindex -plugin @var{name}
889@item -plugin @var{name}
890Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
891the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
892automatically added by the complier, when using link time
893optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
894wish.
895
896Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
897from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
898@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
899those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 900copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 901based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 902just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 903
26278bb8
UD
904@kindex --push-state
905@cindex push state governing input file handling
906@item --push-state
907The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
908flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
909restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
910
911The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
912@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
913@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
914@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
915@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
916@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
917
918One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
919used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
920listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
921something as follows:
922
923@smallexample
924-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
925@end smallexample
926
927@kindex --pop-state
928@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 929@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
930Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
931flags governing input file handling.
932
a712da20
NC
933@kindex -q
934@kindex --emit-relocs
935@cindex retain relocations in final executable
936@item -q
937@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 938Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
939Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
940order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
941in larger executables.
942
dbab7a7b
NC
943This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
944
4f471f39
RS
945@kindex --force-dynamic
946@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
947@item --force-dynamic
948Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
949to VxWorks targets.
950
252b5132
RH
951@cindex partial link
952@cindex relocatable output
953@kindex -r
1049f94e 954@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 955@item -r
1049f94e 956@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 957Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 958turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
959linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
960magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
961@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 962@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
963If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
964linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
965constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
966
62bf86b4
HPN
967When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
968partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
969relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
970example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
971with input files in other formats at all.
972
252b5132
RH
973This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
974
975@kindex -R @var{file}
976@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
977@cindex symbol-only input
978@item -R @var{filename}
979@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
980Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
981relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
982to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
983programs. You may use this option more than once.
984
ff5dcc92 985For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 986followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 987the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
988
989@kindex -s
990@kindex --strip-all
991@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 992@item -s
252b5132
RH
993@itemx --strip-all
994Omit all symbol information from the output file.
995
996@kindex -S
997@kindex --strip-debug
998@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 999@item -S
252b5132
RH
1000@itemx --strip-debug
1001Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1002
a70f34c0
NC
1003@kindex --strip-discarded
1004@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1005@item --strip-discarded
1006@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1007Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1008Enabled by default.
1009
252b5132
RH
1010@kindex -t
1011@kindex --trace
1012@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 1013@item -t
252b5132 1014@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
1015Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1016@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1017@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1018and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1019a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
1020
1021@kindex -T @var{script}
1022@kindex --script=@var{script}
1023@cindex script files
1024@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1025@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1026Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 1027@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 1028@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
1029output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1030the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1031specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1032options accumulate.
252b5132 1033
14be8564
L
1034@kindex -dT @var{script}
1035@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1036@cindex script files
1037@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1038@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1039Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1040
1041This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1042processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1043command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1044@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1045behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1046command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1047the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1048@samp{gcc}).
1049
252b5132
RH
1050@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1051@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1052@cindex undefined symbol
1053@item -u @var{symbol}
1054@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1055Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1056symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1057modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1058different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1059option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1060
0a618243
AB
1061If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1062into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1063undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1064instead.
1065
1066@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1067@cindex symbols, require defined
1068@cindex defined symbol
1069@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1070Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1071is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1072is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1073and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1074@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1075can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1076
252b5132
RH
1077@kindex -Ur
1078@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1079@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1080For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1081@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1082turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1083@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1084It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1085with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1086be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1087@samp{-r} for the others.
1088
c005eb9e
AB
1089@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1090@cindex orphan sections
1091@cindex sections, orphan
1092@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1093Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1094specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1095
1096@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1097
1098@table @code
1099@item place
1100Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1101the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1102@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1103
1104@item discard
1105All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1106@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1107
1108@item warn
1109The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1110issue a warning.
1111
1112@item error
1113The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1114@end table
1115
1116The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1117
577a0623
AM
1118@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1119@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1121@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1122missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1123specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1124multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1125input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1126in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1127
252b5132
RH
1128@kindex -v
1129@kindex -V
1130@kindex --version
1131@cindex version
1132@item -v
1133@itemx --version
1134@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1135Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1136lists the supported emulations.
1137
1138@kindex -x
1139@kindex --discard-all
1140@cindex deleting local symbols
1141@item -x
1142@itemx --discard-all
1143Delete all local symbols.
1144
1145@kindex -X
1146@kindex --discard-locals
1147@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1148@item -X
252b5132 1149@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1150Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1151system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1152or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1153
1154@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1155@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1156@cindex symbol tracing
1157@item -y @var{symbol}
1158@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1159Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1160option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1161to prepend an underscore.
1162
1163This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1164don't know where the reference is coming from.
1165
1166@kindex -Y @var{path}
1167@item -Y @var{path}
1168Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1169for Solaris compatibility.
1170
1171@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1172@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1173The recognized keywords are:
1174@table @samp
1175
e6e2dfbd
AM
1176@item bndplt
1177Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1178
1179@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1180@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1181@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1182@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1183Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1184to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1185@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1186@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1187@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1188@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1189Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1190
233a0083
L
1191@item cet-report=none
1192@itemx cet-report=warning
1193@itemx cet-report=error
1194Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1195GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1196section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1197linker not report missing properties in input files.
1198@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1199missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1200the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1201Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1202GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1203turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1204Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1205
cd6d6c15 1206@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1207@itemx nocombreloc
1208Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1209dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1210
b8871f35 1211@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1212@itemx nocommon
1213Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1214link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1215
1216@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1217Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1218layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1219using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1220
cd6d6c15 1221@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1222Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1223is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1224This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1225
e6e2dfbd
AM
1226@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1227@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1228Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1229if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1230by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1231@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1232may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1233selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1234these options.
1235
6aa29e7b
JJ
1236@item execstack
1237Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1238
b039ef04
L
1239@item global
1240This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1241the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1242of subsequently loaded libraries.
1243
93ab9c0d
NC
1244@item globalaudit
1245This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1246This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1247setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1248tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1249the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1250all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1251
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252@item ibtplt
1253Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1254Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1255
8df93cb5 1256@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1257Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1258to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1259Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1260
cd6d6c15
NC
1261@item initfirst
1262This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1263It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1264before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1265the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1266the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1267objects.
1268
1269@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1270Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1271so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1272libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1273
5fa222e4
AM
1274@item lazy
1275When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1276dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1277the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1278Lazy binding is the default.
1279
cd6d6c15 1280@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1281Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1282
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1284Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1285
e6e2dfbd
AM
1286@item muldefs
1287Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1288
cd6d6c15 1289@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1290Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1291defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1292
1293@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1294Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1295should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1296
1297@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1298Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1299
1300@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1301Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1302
1303@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1304Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1305
6aa29e7b
JJ
1306@item noexecstack
1307Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1308
e6e2dfbd
AM
1309@item noextern-protected-data
1310Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1311library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1312used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1313generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1314module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1315i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1316
e6e2dfbd
AM
1317@item noreloc-overflow
1318Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1319relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1320overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1321
cd6d6c15
NC
1322@item now
1323When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1324dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1325when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1326function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1327called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1328
1329@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1330Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1331
6aa29e7b 1332@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1333@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1334Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1335specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1336relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1337than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1338Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1339
47acac12
L
1340@item separate-code
1341@itemx noseparate-code
1342Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1343specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1344be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1345code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1346
e6e2dfbd
AM
1347@item shstk
1348Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1349to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1350Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1351
04c3a755 1352@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1353Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1354Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1355@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1356
e6e2dfbd
AM
1357@item text
1358@itemx notext
1359@itemx textoff
1360Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1361relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1362@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1363
97a232d7
NC
1364@item undefs
1365Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1366either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1367This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1368
cd6d6c15
NC
1369@end table
1370
ece2d90e 1371Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1372
1373@kindex -(
1374@cindex groups of archives
1375@item -( @var{archives} -)
1376@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1377The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1378either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1379
1380The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1381references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1382the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1383archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1384object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1385would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1386they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1387resolved.
1388
1389Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1390it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1391more archives.
1392
69da35b5
NC
1393@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1394@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1397Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1398recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1399and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1400the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1401behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1402so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1403restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1404
4a43e768
AM
1405@kindex --as-needed
1406@kindex --no-as-needed
1407@item --as-needed
1408@itemx --no-as-needed
1409This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1410on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1411the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1412on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1413needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1414emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1415non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1416the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1417non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1418Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1419the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1420needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1421from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1422
e56f61be
L
1423@kindex --add-needed
1424@kindex --no-add-needed
1425@item --add-needed
1426@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1427These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1428their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1429options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1430and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1431
252b5132
RH
1432@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1433@item -assert @var{keyword}
1434This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1435
1436@kindex -Bdynamic
1437@kindex -dy
1438@kindex -call_shared
1439@item -Bdynamic
1440@itemx -dy
1441@itemx -call_shared
1442Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1443for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1444default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1445for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1446multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1447@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1448
a1ab1d2a
UD
1449@kindex -Bgroup
1450@item -Bgroup
1451Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1452section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1453object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1454@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1455only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1456
252b5132
RH
1457@kindex -Bstatic
1458@kindex -dn
1459@kindex -non_shared
1460@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1461@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1462@itemx -dn
1463@itemx -non_shared
1464@itemx -static
1465Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1466platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1467variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1468may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1469library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1470option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1471option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1472shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1473references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1474libraries.
252b5132
RH
1475
1476@kindex -Bsymbolic
1477@item -Bsymbolic
1478When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1479definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1480for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1481within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1482platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1483
40b36307
L
1484@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1485@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1486When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1487symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1488This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1489libraries.
40b36307 1490
55255dae
L
1491@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1492@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1494typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1495global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1496within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1497to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1498in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1499which support shared libraries.
1500
1501The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1502scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1503
40b36307
L
1504@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1505@item --dynamic-list-data
1506Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1507
1508@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1509@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1511is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1512
0b8a70d9
L
1513@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1514@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1516
252b5132
RH
1517@kindex --check-sections
1518@kindex --no-check-sections
1519@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1520@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1521Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1522been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1523perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1524suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1525allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1526restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1527Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1528force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1529option.
252b5132 1530
ddbb8a31
NC
1531@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1532@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1535This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1536by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1537command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1538output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1539input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1540specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1541follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1542behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1543
1544This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1545libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1546mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1547their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1548required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1549the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1550dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1551symbols.
1552
252b5132
RH
1553@cindex cross reference table
1554@kindex --cref
1555@item --cref
1556Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1557generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1558Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1559
1560The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1561easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1562sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1563symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1564definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1565where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1566symbol are listed.
252b5132 1567
4818e05f
AM
1568@cindex common allocation
1569@kindex --no-define-common
1570@item --no-define-common
1571This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1572The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1573@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1574
1575The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1576the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1577of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1578forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1579Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1580from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1581This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1582and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1583duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1584paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1585
7bdf4127
AB
1586@cindex group allocation in linker script
1587@cindex section groups
1588@cindex COMDAT
1589@kindex --force-group-allocation
1590@item --force-group-allocation
1591This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1592normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1593default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1594change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1595command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1596effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1597
252b5132 1598@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1599@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1600@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1601Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1602address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1603times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1604limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1605context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1606symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1607constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1608using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1609@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1610equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1611
1612@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1613@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1614@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1615@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1616@itemx --no-demangle
1617These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1618and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1619present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1620underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1621mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1622different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1623to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1624demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1625is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1626
1627@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1628@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1629@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1630@item -I@var{file}
1631@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1632Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1633generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1634linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1635doing.
1636
9b8b325a
RF
1637@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1638@item --no-dynamic-linker
1639When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1640linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1641executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1642entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1643
a70f34c0
NC
1644@kindex --embedded-relocs
1645@item --embedded-relocs
1646This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1647that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1648is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1649targets.
1650
3f0a5f17
ME
1651@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1652@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1654in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1655
7ce691ae 1656@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1657@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1658@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1659@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1660Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1661with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1662
252b5132
RH
1663@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1664@item --force-exe-suffix
1665Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1666
1667If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1668@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1669the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1670option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1671Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1672it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1673
1674@kindex --gc-sections
1675@kindex --no-gc-sections
1676@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1677@item --gc-sections
1678@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1679Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1680targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1681performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1682@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1683collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1684implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1685
d5465ba2
AM
1686@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1687examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1688symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1689command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1690referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1691libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1692referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1693the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1694relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1695@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1696
ac69cbc6 1697This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1698@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1699specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1700@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1701command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1702
c17d87de
NC
1703@kindex --print-gc-sections
1704@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1705@cindex garbage collection
1706@item --print-gc-sections
1707@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1708List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1709printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1710collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1711default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1712be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1713line.
1714
22185505 1715@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1716@cindex garbage collection
1717@item --gc-keep-exported
1718When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1719collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1720default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1721executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1722collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1723Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1724it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1725ELF format targets.
1726
30824704
RM
1727@kindex --print-output-format
1728@cindex output format
1729@item --print-output-format
1730Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1731other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1732in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1733
3604cb1f
TG
1734@kindex --print-memory-usage
1735@cindex memory usage
1736@item --print-memory-usage
1737Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1738the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1739quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1740headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1741parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1742
1743@smallexample
1744Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1745 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1746 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1747@end smallexample
1748
252b5132
RH
1749@cindex help
1750@cindex usage
1751@kindex --help
1752@item --help
1753Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1754
ea20a7da
CC
1755@kindex --target-help
1756@item --target-help
a094d01f 1757Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1758
2509a395
SL
1759@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1760@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1761Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1762@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1763
1764@cindex memory usage
1765@kindex --no-keep-memory
1766@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1767@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1768symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1769instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1770necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1771while linking a large executable.
1772
1773@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1774@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1775@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1776@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1777@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1778Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1779is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1780The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1781behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1782libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1783
97a232d7
NC
1784The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1785
aa713662
L
1786@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1787@kindex -z muldefs
1788@item --allow-multiple-definition
1789@itemx -z muldefs
1790Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1791report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1792first definition will be used.
1793
b79e8c78 1794@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1795@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1796@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1797@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1798Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1799This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1800determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1801shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1802how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1803
903249d7
NC
1804The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1805referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1806an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1807a shared library.
1808
1809The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1810libraries specified at link time are that:
1811
1812@itemize @bullet
1813@item
1814A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1815that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1816resolvable at load time.
1817@item
1818There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1819symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1820
1821The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1822select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1823architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1824appropriate memset function.
1825@end itemize
b79e8c78 1826
31941635
L
1827@kindex --no-undefined-version
1828@item --no-undefined-version
1829Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1830it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1831will be issued instead.
1832
3e3b46e5
PB
1833@kindex --default-symver
1834@item --default-symver
1835Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1836exported symbols.
1837
1838@kindex --default-imported-symver
1839@item --default-imported-symver
1840Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1841imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1842
252b5132
RH
1843@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1844@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1845Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1846files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1847been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1848This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1849errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1850have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1851inappropriate.
1852
fe7929ce
AM
1853@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1854@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1856library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1857
252b5132
RH
1858@kindex --no-whole-archive
1859@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1860Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1861archive files.
1862
1863@cindex output file after errors
1864@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1865@item --noinhibit-exec
1866Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1867Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1868errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1869when it issues any error whatsoever.
1870
0a9c1c8e
CD
1871@kindex -nostdlib
1872@item -nostdlib
1873Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1874command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1875(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1876
252b5132 1877@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1878@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1879@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1880@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1881file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1882@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1883object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1884object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1885should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1886usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1887name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1888list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1889command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1890this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1891@end ifclear
1892
76359541
TP
1893@kindex --out-implib
1894@item --out-implib @var{file}
1895Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1896the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1897library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1898may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1899behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1900step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1901the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1902
36af4a4e
JJ
1903@kindex -pie
1904@kindex --pic-executable
1905@item -pie
1906@itemx --pic-executable
1907@cindex position independent executables
1908Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1909ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1910libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1911address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1912normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1913defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1914
252b5132
RH
1915@kindex -qmagic
1916@item -qmagic
1917This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1918
1919@kindex -Qy
1920@item -Qy
1921This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1922
1923@kindex --relax
1924@cindex synthesizing linker
1925@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1926@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1927@item --relax
28d5f677 1928@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1929An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1930@ifset GENERIC
1931This option is only supported on a few targets.
1932@end ifset
1933@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1934@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1935@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1936@ifset XTENSA
1937@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1938@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1939@ifset M68HC11
1940@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1941@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1942@ifset NIOSII
1943@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1944@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1945@ifset POWERPC
1946@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1947@end ifset
252b5132 1948
a094d01f 1949On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1950global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1951addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1952synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1953instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1954
1955On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1956debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1957@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1958This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1959family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1960@end ifset
1961
1962@ifset GENERIC
1963On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1964but ignored.
1965@end ifset
1966
28d5f677
NC
1967On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1968@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1969
252b5132
RH
1970@cindex retaining specified symbols
1971@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1972@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1973@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1974@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1975Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1976discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1977symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1978@ifset GENERIC
1979(such as VxWorks)
1980@end ifset
1981where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1982run-time memory.
1983
1984@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1985or symbols needed for relocations.
1986
1987You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1988line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1989
1990@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1991@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1992@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1993@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1994Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1995linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1996arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1997them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1998
1999The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2000are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2001description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2002in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2003have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2004
2005If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2006contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2007is defined.
252b5132 2008
ff5dcc92 2009The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 2010SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
2011@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2012runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2013options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2014gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 2015file systems.
252b5132 2016
ff5dcc92 2017For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 2018followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 2019the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
2020@end ifset
2021
2022@ifset GENERIC
2023@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
2024@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2025@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
2026When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2027happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2028of the input files.
2029
2030When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2031non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2032shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 2033explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 2034specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 2035@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
2036either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2037appearing multiple times.
2038
e680a6b6
NC
2039The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2040directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2041containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2042and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204364-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2044
2045The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2046@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2047supported.
2048
28c309a2
NC
2049This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2050that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2051is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2052runtime linker would do.
2053
252b5132 2054The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2055libraries:
d8e4137b 2056
252b5132
RH
2057@enumerate
2058@item
ff5dcc92 2059Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2060@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2061Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2062between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2063specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2064used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2065at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2066by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2067the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2068@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2069On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2070@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2071environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2072@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2073On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2074directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2075@item
a1b8d843 2076For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2077variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2078@item
ec4eb78a
L
2079For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2080@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2081libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2082@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2083@item
252b5132
RH
2084The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2085@item
d8e4137b
NC
2086For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2087exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2088to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2089defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2090configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2091@item
2092For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2093the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2094header file.
2095@item
2096Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2097linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2098@end enumerate
2099
2100If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2101warning and continue with the link.
2102@end ifset
2103
2104@kindex -shared
2105@kindex -Bshareable
2106@item -shared
2107@itemx -Bshareable
2108@cindex shared libraries
2109Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2110and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2111shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2112undefined symbols in the link.
2113
252b5132 2114@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2115@item --sort-common
2116@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2117@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2118This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2119ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2120sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2121eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2122between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2123specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2124
2509a395
SL
2125@kindex --sort-section=name
2126@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2127This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2128patterns in the linker script.
2129
2509a395
SL
2130@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2131@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2132This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2133patterns in the linker script.
2134
a70f34c0
NC
2135@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2136@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2137This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2138.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2139post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2140
252b5132 2141@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2142@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2143Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2144each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2145size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2146
2147@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2148@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2149Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2150output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2151This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2152certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2153cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2154that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2155support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2156input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2157more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2158many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --stats
2161@item --stats
2162Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2163as execution time and memory usage.
2164
2509a395 2165@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2166@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2167Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2168configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2169that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2170
a70f34c0
NC
2171@kindex --task-link
2172@item --task-link
2173This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2174file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2175
252b5132
RH
2176@kindex --traditional-format
2177@cindex traditional format
2178@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2179For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2180the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2181use the traditional format instead.
2182
2183@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2184For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2185symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2186full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2187@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2188trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2189combine duplicate entries.
2190
2509a395
SL
2191@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2192@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2193Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2194address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2195times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2196line.
2197@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2198for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2199@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2200should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2201sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2202
2509a395
SL
2203@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2204@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2205@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2206@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2207@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2208@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2209@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2210Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2211@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2212
2509a395
SL
2213@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2214@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2215@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2216When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2217byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2218
9d5777a3
RM
2219@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2220@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2222When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2223the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2224text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2225
0d705e9f
AM
2226@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2227@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2229When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2230model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2231
560e09e9
NC
2232@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2233@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2234Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2235values for @samp{method}:
2236
2237@table @samp
2238@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2239Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2240
2241@item report-all
da8bce14 2242Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2243
2244@item ignore-in-object-files
2245Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2246ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2247
2248@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2249Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2250ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2251when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2252libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2253command line.
2254@end table
2255
2256The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2257by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2258
2259Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2260unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2261can change this to a warning.
2262
1715a13c
L
2263@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2264@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2265@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2266@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2267Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2268supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2269the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2270argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2271
2272@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2273@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2274@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2275Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2276used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2277about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2278is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2279see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2280use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2281symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2282@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2283
7ce691ae 2284@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2285@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2286@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2287@item --warn-common
2288Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2289a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2290but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2291you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2292Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2293warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2294
2295There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2296
2297@table @samp
2298@item int i = 1;
2299A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2300file.
2301
2302@item extern int i;
2303An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2304There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2305variable somewhere.
2306
2307@item int i;
2308A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2309variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2310The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2311single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2312size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2313a definition of the same variable.
2314@end table
2315
2316The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2317Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2318just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2319encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2320a common symbol.
2321
2322@enumerate
2323@item
2324Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2325definition for the symbol.
2326@smallexample
2327@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2328 overridden by definition
2329@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2330@end smallexample
2331
2332@item
2333Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2334the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2335except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2336@smallexample
2337@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2338 overriding common
2339@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2340@end smallexample
2341
2342@item
2343Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2344@smallexample
2345@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2346 of `@var{symbol}'
2347@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2348@end smallexample
2349
2350@item
2351Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2352@smallexample
2353@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2354 overridden by larger common
2355@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2356@end smallexample
2357
2358@item
2359Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2360the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2361encountered in a different order.
2362@smallexample
2363@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2364 overriding smaller common
2365@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2366@end smallexample
2367@end enumerate
2368
2369@kindex --warn-constructors
2370@item --warn-constructors
2371Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2372object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2373detect the use of global constructors.
2374
2375@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2376@item --warn-multiple-gp
2377Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2378This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2379Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2380section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2381of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2382base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2383base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2384bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2385large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2386values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2387option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2388
2389@kindex --warn-once
2390@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2391@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2392@item --warn-once
2393Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2394which refers to it.
2395
2396@kindex --warn-section-align
2397@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2398@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2399@item --warn-section-align
2400Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2401alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2402The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2403is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2404the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2405
8fdd7217
NC
2406@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2407@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2408Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2409
a0c402a5
L
2410@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2411@item --warn-alternate-em
2412Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2413
560e09e9
NC
2414@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2415@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2416If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2417@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2418This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2419
2420@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2421@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2422This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2423it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2424
252b5132
RH
2425@kindex --whole-archive
2426@cindex including an entire archive
2427@item --whole-archive
2428For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2429@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2430in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2431files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2432library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2433library. This option may be used more than once.
2434
7ec229ce 2435Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2436about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2437Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2438list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2439your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2440
2509a395
SL
2441@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2442@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2443Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2444@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2445undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2446@var{symbol}.
2447
2448This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2449wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2450wishes to call the system function, it should call
2451@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2452
2453Here is a trivial example:
2454
2455@smallexample
2456void *
cc2f008e 2457__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2458@{
cc2f008e 2459 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2460 return __real_malloc (c);
2461@}
2462@end smallexample
2463
ff5dcc92 2464If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2465all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2466instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2467call the real @code{malloc} function.
2468
2469You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2470links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2471you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2472file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2473call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2474
4ea904ed
SH
2475Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2476internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2477@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2478@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2479
2480@smallexample
2481int
2482f (void)
2483@{
2484 return 123;
2485@}
2486
2487int
2488g (void)
2489@{
2490 return f();
2491@}
2492@end smallexample
2493
6aa29e7b 2494@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2495@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2496@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2497@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2498Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2499(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2500section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2501
e41b3a13
JJ
2502@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2503@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2504Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2505generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2506if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2507
6c1439be
L
2508@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2509@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2510@item --enable-new-dtags
2511@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2512This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2513systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2514@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2515and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2516If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2517created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2518those options are only available for ELF systems.
2519
2d643429 2520@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2521@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2522Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2523close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2524time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2525increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2526value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2527
fdc90cb4
JJ
2528@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2529@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2530Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2531@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2532new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2533the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2534hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2535but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2536
0ce398f1
L
2537@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2538@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2539@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2540@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2541@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2542@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2543@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2544@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2545On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2546compressed using zlib.
2547
2548@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2549sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2550DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2551instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2552also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2553sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2554
2555The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2556@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2557
2558Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2559sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2560for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2561uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2562
2563The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2564involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2565default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2566@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2567
35835446
JR
2568@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2569@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2570This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2571linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2572for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2573about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2574
4f9c04f7 2575Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25761021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2577run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2578has been used.
2579
2580The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2581enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2582
c0065db7
RM
2583@kindex --build-id
2584@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2585@item --build-id
2586@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2587Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2588or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2589unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2590@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2591@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2592@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2593the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2594string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2595@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2596is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2597
2598The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2599that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2600unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2601to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2602file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2603string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2604
2605Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2606@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2607@end table
2608
0285c67d
NC
2609@c man end
2610
36f63dca 2611@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2612
0285c67d
NC
2613@c man begin OPTIONS
2614
ff5dcc92 2615The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2616the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2617normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2618use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2619@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2620like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2621symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2622object file).
2623
2624In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2625support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2626PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2627values by either a space or an equals sign.
2628
ff5dcc92 2629@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2630
2631@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2632@item --add-stdcall-alias
2633If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2634as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2635[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2636
2637@kindex --base-file
2638@item --base-file @var{file}
2639Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2640addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2641@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2642[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --dll
2645@item --dll
2646Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2647@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2648file.
bb10df36 2649[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2650
88183869
DK
2651@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2652@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2653@item --enable-long-section-names
2654@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2655The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2656the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2657for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2658fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2659to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2660allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2661disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2662generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2663as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2664with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2665GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2666information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2667option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2668section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2669when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2670image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2671[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2672
252b5132
RH
2673@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2674@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2675@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2676@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2677If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2678do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2679only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2680resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2681undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2682@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2683to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2684warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2685import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2686to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2687feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2688@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2689mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2691
522f09cd
KT
2692@kindex --leading-underscore
2693@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2694@item --leading-underscore
2695@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2696For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2697in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2698disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2699
252b5132
RH
2700@cindex DLLs, creating
2701@kindex --export-all-symbols
2702@item --export-all-symbols
2703If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2704be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2705otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2706explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2707attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2708option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2709@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2710@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2711exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2712re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2713such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2714@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2715@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2716Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2717not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2718extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2719(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2720These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2721@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2722@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2723@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2724@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2725[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2726
2727@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2728@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2729Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2730exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2731[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2732
2927aaca
NC
2733@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2734@item --exclude-all-symbols
2735Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2736[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2737
252b5132
RH
2738@kindex --file-alignment
2739@item --file-alignment
2740Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2741file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2742512.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2744
2745@cindex heap size
2746@kindex --heap
2747@item --heap @var{reserve}
2748@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2749Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2750to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2751committed.
bb10df36 2752[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2753
2754@cindex image base
2755@kindex --image-base
2756@item --image-base @var{value}
2757Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2758the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2759is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2760your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2761other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2762for dlls.
bb10df36 2763[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2764
2765@kindex --kill-at
2766@item --kill-at
2767If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2768symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2769[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2770
26d2d8a2
BF
2771@kindex --large-address-aware
2772@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2773If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2774header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2775greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2776or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2777section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2778[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2779
f69a2f97
NC
2780@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2781@item --disable-large-address-aware
2782Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2783This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2784driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2785addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2786[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2787
252b5132
RH
2788@kindex --major-image-version
2789@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2790Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2791[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2792
2793@kindex --major-os-version
2794@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2795Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2796[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2797
2798@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2799@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2800Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2801[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2802
2803@kindex --minor-image-version
2804@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2805Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2806[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2807
2808@kindex --minor-os-version
2809@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2810Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2811[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2812
2813@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2814@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2815Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2816[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2817
2818@cindex DEF files, creating
2819@cindex DLLs, creating
2820@kindex --output-def
2821@item --output-def @var{file}
2822The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2823file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2824(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2825library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2826automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2827[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2828
b044cda1 2829@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2830@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2831@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2832@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2833Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2834@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2835By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2836for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2837execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2838[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2839
2840@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2841@item --disable-auto-image-base
2842Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2843user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2844default.
bb10df36 2845[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2846
2847@cindex DLLs, linking to
2848@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2849@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2850When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2851search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2852@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2853between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2854uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2855@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2856[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2857
2858@kindex --enable-auto-import
2859@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2860Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2861DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2862mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2863[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2864
2865The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2866feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2867
2868Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2869of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2870PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2871
e2a83dd0
NC
2872Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2873data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2874placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2875around a problem with consts that is described here:
2876http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2877
4d8907ac
DS
2878Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2879see this message:
0d888aac 2880
ece2d90e 2881"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2882documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2883
ece2d90e
NC
2884This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2885ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2886allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2887fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2888constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2889multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2890this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2891of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2892the warning, and exit.
2893
2894There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2895data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2896
2fa9fc65
NC
2897One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2898of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2899this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2900
c0065db7
RM
2901A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2902that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2903there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2904a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2905
2906@example
2907extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2908extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2909 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2910@end example
2911
2912or
2913
2914@example
2915extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2916extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2917 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2918@end example
2919
c0065db7 2920For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2921is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2922
2923@example
2924extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2925extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2926 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2927@end example
2928
c406afaf
NC
2929or
2930
2931@example
2932extern long long extern_ll;
2933extern_ll -->
2934 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2935@end example
2936
2fa9fc65 2937A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2938'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2939@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2940requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2941building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2942merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2943between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2944constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2945
2946Original:
2947@example
2948--foo.h
2949extern int arr[];
2950--foo.c
2951#include "foo.h"
2952void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2953 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2954@}
2955@end example
2956
2957Solution 1:
2958@example
2959--foo.h
2960extern int arr[];
2961--foo.c
2962#include "foo.h"
2963void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2964 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2965 volatile int *parr = arr;
2966 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2967@}
2968@end example
2969
2970Solution 2:
2971@example
2972--foo.h
2973/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2974#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2975 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2976#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2977#else
2978#define FOO_IMPORT
2979#endif
2980extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2981--foo.c
2982#include "foo.h"
2983void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2984 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2985@}
2986@end example
2987
c0065db7 2988A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2989library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2990for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2991functions).
b044cda1
CW
2992
2993@kindex --disable-auto-import
2994@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2995Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2996@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2997[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2998
2fa9fc65
NC
2999@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3000@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3001If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3002that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3003a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 3004environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 3005[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
3006
3007@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3008@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 3009Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 3010[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 3011
b044cda1
CW
3012@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3013@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3014Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 3015[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 3016
252b5132
RH
3017@kindex --section-alignment
3018@item --section-alignment
3019Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3020addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 3021[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3022
3023@cindex stack size
3024@kindex --stack
3025@item --stack @var{reserve}
3026@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 3027Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 3028to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 3029committed.
bb10df36 3030[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
3031
3032@kindex --subsystem
3033@item --subsystem @var{which}
3034@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3035@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3036Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3037legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
3038@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3039the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3040@var{which}.
bb10df36 3041[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3042
2f563b51
DK
3043The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3044of the PE file header:
3045[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3046
2d5c3743
NC
3047@kindex --high-entropy-va
3048@item --high-entropy-va
3049Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3050(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3051This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3052@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3053
2f563b51
DK
3054@kindex --dynamicbase
3055@item --dynamicbase
3056The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3057randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3058Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3059This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3060
3061@kindex --forceinteg
3062@item --forceinteg
3063Code integrity checks are enforced.
3064
3065@kindex --nxcompat
3066@item --nxcompat
3067The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3068This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3069
3070@kindex --no-isolation
3071@item --no-isolation
3072Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3073
3074@kindex --no-seh
3075@item --no-seh
3076The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3077this image.
3078
3079@kindex --no-bind
3080@item --no-bind
3081Do not bind this image.
3082
3083@kindex --wdmdriver
3084@item --wdmdriver
3085The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3086
2f563b51
DK
3087@kindex --tsaware
3088@item --tsaware
3089The image is Terminal Server aware.
3090
0cb112f7
CF
3091@kindex --insert-timestamp
3092@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3093@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3094Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3095as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3096other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3097will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3098same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3099can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3100that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3101identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3102
3103@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3104@item --enable-reloc-section
3105Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3106is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3107@end table
3108
0285c67d
NC
3109@c man end
3110
ac145307
BS
3111@ifset C6X
3112@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3113
3114@c man begin OPTIONS
3115
3116The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3117libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3118all executables use an index of 0.
3119
3120@table @gcctabopt
3121
3122@kindex --dsbt-size
3123@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3124This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3125or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3126entries.
3127
3128@kindex --dsbt-index
3129@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3130This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3131to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3132executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3133@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3134
fbd9ad90
PB
3135@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3136The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3137exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3138
ac145307
BS
3139@end table
3140
3141@c man end
3142@end ifset
3143
b8891f8d
AJ
3144@ifset CSKY
3145@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3146
3147@c man begin OPTIONS
3148
3149@table @gcctabopt
3150
3151@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3152@item --branch-stub
3153This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3154sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3155usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3156can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3157the compiler or assembler.
3158
3159@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3160@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3161This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3162It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3163be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3164stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3165sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3166@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3167linker should choose suitable defaults.
3168
3169@end table
3170
3171@c man end
3172@end ifset
3173
93fd0973
SC
3174@ifset M68HC11
3175@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3176
3177@c man begin OPTIONS
3178
3179The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3180memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3181
3182@table @gcctabopt
3183
3184@kindex --no-trampoline
3185@item --no-trampoline
3186This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3187is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3188instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3189
3190@kindex --bank-window
3191@item --bank-window @var{name}
3192This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3193the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3194The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3195paging and addresses within the memory window.
3196
3197@end table
3198
3199@c man end
3200@end ifset
3201
7fb9f789
NC
3202@ifset M68K
3203@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3204
3205@c man begin OPTIONS
3206
3207The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3208when linking for 68K targets.
3209
3210@table @gcctabopt
3211
3212@kindex --got
3213@item --got=@var{type}
3214This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3215@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3216@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3217Info entry for @file{ld}.
3218
3219@end table
3220
3221@c man end
3222@end ifset
3223
833794fc
MR
3224@ifset MIPS
3225@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3226
3227@c man begin OPTIONS
3228
3229The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3230generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3231linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3232
3233@table @gcctabopt
3234
3235@kindex --insn32
3236@item --insn32
3237@kindex --no-insn32
3238@itemx --no-insn32
3239These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3240generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3241or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324232-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3243used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3244possible.
3245
8b10b0b3
MR
3246@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3247@item --ignore-branch-isa
3248@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3249@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3250These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3251transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3252accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3253is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3254instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3255equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3256calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3257a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3258an error.
3259
3734320d
MF
3260@kindex --compact-branches
3261@item --compact-branches
3262@kindex --no-compact-branches
3263@item --compact-branches
3264These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3265in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3266
833794fc
MR
3267@end table
3268
3269@c man end
3270@end ifset
3271
252b5132
RH
3272@ifset UsesEnvVars
3273@node Environment
3274@section Environment Variables
3275
0285c67d
NC
3276@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3277
560e09e9 3278You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3279@ifclear SingleFormat
3280@code{GNUTARGET},
3281@end ifclear
3282@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3283
36f63dca 3284@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3285@kindex GNUTARGET
3286@cindex default input format
3287@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3288use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3289of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3290@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3291of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3292attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3293this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3294there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3295object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3296BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3297in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3298@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3299
3300@kindex LDEMULATION
3301@cindex default emulation
3302@cindex emulation, default
3303@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3304@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3305behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3306available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3307the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3308variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3309linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3310
3311@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3312@cindex demangling, default
3313Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3314@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3315default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3316a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3317may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3318options.
3319
0285c67d
NC
3320@c man end
3321@end ifset
3322
252b5132
RH
3323@node Scripts
3324@chapter Linker Scripts
3325
3326@cindex scripts
3327@cindex linker scripts
3328@cindex command files
3329Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3330written in the linker command language.
3331
3332The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3333the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3334the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3335more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3336direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3337described below.
3338
3339The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3340yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3341linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3342to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3343such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3344
3345You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3346line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3347default linker script.
3348
3349You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3350to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3351Linker Scripts}.
3352
3353@menu
3354* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3355* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3356* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3357* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3358* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3359* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3360* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3361* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3362* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3363* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3364* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3365@end menu
3366
3367@node Basic Script Concepts
3368@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3369@cindex linker script concepts
3370We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3371describe the linker script language.
3372
3373The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3374file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3375@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3376The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3377purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3378among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3379section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3380in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3381
3382Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3383also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3384contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3385the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3386A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3387area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3388loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3389which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3390of debugging information.
3391
3392Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3393first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3394the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3395@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3396section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3397same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3398is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3399(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3400based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3401RAM address would be the VMA.
3402
3403You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3404program with the @samp{-h} option.
3405
3406Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3407@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3408has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3409information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3410will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3411static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3412referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3413
3414You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3415program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3416option.
3417
3418@node Script Format
3419@section Linker Script Format
3420@cindex linker script format
3421Linker scripts are text files.
3422
3423You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3424either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3425symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3426generally ignored.
3427
3428Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3429If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3430otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3431double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3432file name.
3433
3434You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3435@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3436to whitespace.
3437
3438@node Simple Example
3439@section Simple Linker Script Example
3440@cindex linker script example
3441@cindex example of linker script
3442Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3443
3444The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3445@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3446memory layout of the output file.
3447
3448The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3449describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3450code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3451@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3452Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3453your input files.
3454
3455For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
34560x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3457linker script which will do that:
3458@smallexample
3459SECTIONS
3460@{
3461 . = 0x10000;
3462 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3463 . = 0x8000000;
3464 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3465 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3466@}
3467@end smallexample
3468
3469You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3470followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3471descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3472
252b5132
RH
3473The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3474sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3475counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3476other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3477current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3478incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3479@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3480
3481The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3482required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3483after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3484which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3485wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3486means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3487
3488Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3489@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3490@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3491
3492The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3493the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3494at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3495output section, the value of the location counter will be
3496@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3497effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3498immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3499
3500The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3501alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3502example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3503sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3504may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3505sections.
3506
3507That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3508
3509@node Simple Commands
3510@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3511@cindex linker script simple commands
3512In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3513
3514@menu
3515* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3516* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3517@ifclear SingleFormat
3518* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3519@end ifclear
3520
4a93e180 3521* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3522* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3523@end menu
3524
3525@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3526@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3527@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3528@cindex start of execution
3529@cindex first instruction
3530@cindex entry point
3531The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3532point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3533entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3534@smallexample
3535ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3536@end smallexample
3537
3538There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3539entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3540stopping when one of them succeeds:
3541@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3542@item
252b5132 3543the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3544@item
252b5132 3545the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3546@item
a094d01f 3547the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3548targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3549check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3550@item
252b5132 3551the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3552@item
252b5132
RH
3553The address @code{0}.
3554@end itemize
3555
3556@node File Commands
36f63dca 3557@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3558@cindex linker script file commands
3559Several linker script commands deal with files.
3560
3561@table @code
3562@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3563@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3564@cindex including a linker script
3565Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3566be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3567with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
356810 levels deep.
3569
4006703d
NS
3570You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3571@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3572
252b5132
RH
3573@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3574@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3575@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3576@cindex input files in linker scripts
3577@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3578@cindex linker script input object files
3579The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3580in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3581
3582For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3583a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3584then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3585
3586In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3587script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3588
e3f2db7f
AO
3589In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3590with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3591located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3592for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3593open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3594linker will search through the archive library search path.
3595The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3596as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3597path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3598@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3599
ff5dcc92 3600If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3601name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3602@samp{-l}.
3603
3604When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3605files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3606script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3607
3608@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3609@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3610@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3611@cindex grouping input files
3612The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3613files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3614new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3615in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3616
b717d30e
JJ
3617@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3618@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3619@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3620This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3621commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3622as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3623with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3624when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3625@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3626and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3627setting afterwards.
3628
252b5132
RH
3629@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3630@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3631@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3632The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3633@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3634@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3635Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3636precedence.
3637
3638You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3639output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3640
3641@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3642@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3643@cindex library search path in linker script
3644@cindex archive search path in linker script
3645@cindex search path in linker script
3646The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3647@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3648@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3649on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3650are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3651the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3652
3653@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3654@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3655@cindex first input file
3656The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3657that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3658though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3659when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3660first file.
3661@end table
3662
3663@ifclear SingleFormat
3664@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3665@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3666A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3667
3668@table @code
3669@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3670@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3671@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3672@cindex output file format in linker script
3673The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3674output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3675exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3676(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3677line option takes precedence.
3678
3679You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3680formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3681This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3682desired endianness.
3683
3684If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3685will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3686output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3687used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3688
3689For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3690command:
3691@smallexample
3692OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3693@end smallexample
3694This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3695@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3696option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3697format.
3698
3699@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3700@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3701@cindex input file format in linker script
3702The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3703files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3704This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3705(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3706is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3707command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3708@end table
3709@end ifclear
3710
4a93e180
NC
3711@node REGION_ALIAS
3712@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3713@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3714@cindex region alias
3715@cindex region names
3716
3717Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3718@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3719
3720@smallexample
3721REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3722@end smallexample
3723
3724The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3725memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3726to memory regions. An example follows.
3727
3728Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3729memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3730that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3731non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3732access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3733read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3734sections:
3735
3736@itemize @bullet
3737@item
3738@code{.text} program code;
3739@item
3740@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3741@item
3742@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3743@item
3744@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3745@end itemize
3746
3747The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3748part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3749output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3750systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3751@code{C}:
3752@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3753@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3754@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3755@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3756@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3757@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3758@end multitable
3759The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3760loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3761the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3762the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3763
3764The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3765includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3766memory layout:
3767@smallexample
3768INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3769
3770SECTIONS
3771 @{
3772 .text :
3773 @{
3774 *(.text)
3775 @} > REGION_TEXT
3776 .rodata :
3777 @{
3778 *(.rodata)
3779 rodata_end = .;
3780 @} > REGION_RODATA
3781 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3782 @{
3783 data_start = .;
3784 *(.data)
3785 @} > REGION_DATA
3786 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3787 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3788 .bss :
3789 @{
3790 *(.bss)
3791 @} > REGION_BSS
3792 @}
3793@end smallexample
3794
3795Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3796regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3797variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3798@table @code
3799@item A
3800Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3801@smallexample
3802MEMORY
3803 @{
3804 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3805 @}
3806
3807REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3808REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3809REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3810REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3811@end smallexample
3812@item B
3813Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3814into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3815@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3816@smallexample
3817MEMORY
3818 @{
3819 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3820 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3821 @}
3822
3823REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3824REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3825REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3826REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3827@end smallexample
3828@item C
3829Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3830@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3831initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3832system start into the @code{RAM}.
3833@smallexample
3834MEMORY
3835 @{
3836 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3837 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3838 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3839 @}
3840
3841REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3842REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3843REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3844REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3845@end smallexample
3846@end table
3847
3848It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3849@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3850necessary:
3851@smallexample
3852#include <string.h>
3853
3854extern char data_start [];
3855extern char data_size [];
3856extern char data_load_start [];
3857
3858void copy_data(void)
3859@{
3860 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3861 @{
3862 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3863 @}
3864@}
3865@end smallexample
3866
252b5132 3867@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3868@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3869There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3870
3871@table @code
3872@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3873@kindex ASSERT
3874@cindex assertion in linker script
3875Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3876with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3877
fd1c4238
NC
3878Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3879take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3880inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3881for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3882symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3883
3884@smallexample
3885 .stack :
3886 @{
3887 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3888 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3889 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3890 @}
3891@end smallexample
3892
3893will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3894PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3895can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3896
3897@smallexample
3898 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3899 .stack :
3900 @{
3901 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3902 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3903 @}
3904@end smallexample
3905
3906will work.
3907
252b5132
RH
3908@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3909@kindex EXTERN
3910@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3911Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3912symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3913modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3914each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3915command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3916
3917@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3918@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3919@cindex common allocation in linker script
3920This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3921to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3922output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3923
4818e05f
AM
3924@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3925@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3926@cindex common allocation in linker script
3927This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3928command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3929to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3930
7bdf4127
AB
3931@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3932@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3933@cindex group allocation in linker script
3934@cindex section groups
3935@cindex COMDAT
3936This command has the same effect as the
3937@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3938@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3939and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3940specified (@samp{-r}).
3941
53d25da6
AM
3942@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3943@kindex INSERT
3944@cindex insert user script into default script
3945This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3946augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3947inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3948@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3949default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3950sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3951linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3952insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3953linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3954default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3955of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3956to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3957is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3958
3959@smallexample
3960SECTIONS
3961@{
3962 OVERLAY :
3963 @{
3964 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3965 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3966 @}
3967@}
3968INSERT AFTER .text;
3969@end smallexample
3970
252b5132
RH
3971@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3972@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3973@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3974This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3975references among certain output sections.
3976
3977In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3978using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3979will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3980errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3981a function defined in the other section.
3982
3983The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3984@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3985an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3986@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3987names.
3988
cdf96953
MF
3989@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3990@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3991@cindex cross references
3992This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3993references to one section from a list of other sections.
3994
3995The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3996output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3997a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3998there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3999must never call back.
4000
4001The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4002The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4003If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4004the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4005status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4006names, not input section names.
4007
252b5132
RH
4008@ifclear SingleFormat
4009@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4010@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4011@cindex machine architecture
4012@cindex architecture
4013Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4014of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4015architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4016the @samp{-f} option.
4017@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
4018
4019@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4020@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4021This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4022@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4023in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4024@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
4025@end table
4026
4027@node Assignments
4028@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4029@cindex assignment in scripts
4030@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4031@cindex variables, defining
4032You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 4033the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
4034
4035@menu
4036* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 4037* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 4038* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 4039* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 4040* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
4041@end menu
4042
4043@node Simple Assignments
4044@subsection Simple Assignments
4045
4046You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4047
4048@table @code
4049@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4050@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4051@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4052@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4053@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4054@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4055@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4056@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4057@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4058@end table
4059
4060The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4061@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4062defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4063
4064The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4065may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4066
4067The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4068
4069Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4070
4071You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4072statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4073section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4074
4075The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4076expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4077
4078Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4079assignments may be used:
4080
4081@smallexample
4082floating_point = 0;
4083SECTIONS
4084@{
4085 .text :
4086 @{
4087 *(.text)
4088 _etext = .;
4089 @}
156e34dd 4090 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4091 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4092@}
4093@end smallexample
4094@noindent
4095In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4096zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4097the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4098defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4099upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4100
eb8476a6
MR
4101@node HIDDEN
4102@subsection HIDDEN
4103@cindex HIDDEN
4104For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4105exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4106
4107Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4108@code{HIDDEN}:
4109
4110@smallexample
4111HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4112SECTIONS
4113@{
4114 .text :
4115 @{
4116 *(.text)
4117 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4118 @}
4119 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4120 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4121@}
4122@end smallexample
4123@noindent
4124In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4125
252b5132
RH
4126@node PROVIDE
4127@subsection PROVIDE
4128@cindex PROVIDE
4129In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4130only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4131the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4132@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4133@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4134@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4135@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4136@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4137
4138Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4139@smallexample
4140SECTIONS
4141@{
4142 .text :
4143 @{
4144 *(.text)
4145 _etext = .;
4146 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4147 @}
4148@}
4149@end smallexample
4150
4151In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4152underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4153the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4154underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4155If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4156linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4157
b0daac83
NC
4158Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4159defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4160that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4161when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4162@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4163
7af8e998
L
4164@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4165@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4166@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4167Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4168hidden and won't be exported.
4169
73ae6183
NC
4170@node Source Code Reference
4171@subsection Source Code Reference
4172
4173Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4174intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4175a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4176symbol that does not have a value.
4177
4178Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4179transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4180stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4181prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4182mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4183of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4184variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4185linker script variable might be referred to as:
4186
4187@smallexample
4188 extern int foo;
4189@end smallexample
4190
4191But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4192
4193@smallexample
4194 _foo = 1000;
4195@end smallexample
4196
4197In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4198transformation has taken place.
4199
4200When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4201things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4202in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4203second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4204table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4205contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4206value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4207
4208@smallexample
4209 int foo = 1000;
4210@end smallexample
4211
10bf6894 4212creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4213holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4214number 1000 is initially stored.
4215
4216When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4217first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4218memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4219So:
4220
4221@smallexample
4222 foo = 1;
4223@end smallexample
4224
4225looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4226associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4227address. Whereas:
4228
4229@smallexample
4230 int * a = & foo;
4231@end smallexample
4232
10bf6894 4233looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4234and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4235the variable @samp{a}.
4236
4237Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4238the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4239an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4240
4241@smallexample
4242 foo = 1000;
4243@end smallexample
4244
4245creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4246the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4247address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4248linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4249access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4250
4251Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4252you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4253use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4254section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4255linker script contains these declarations:
4256
4257@smallexample
4258@group
4259 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4260 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4261 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4262@end group
4263@end smallexample
4264
4265Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4266
4267@smallexample
4268@group
4269 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4270
73ae6183
NC
4271 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4272@end group
4273@end smallexample
4274
4275Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4276Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4277arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4278
4279@smallexample
4280@group
4281 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4282
4283 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4284@end group
4285@end smallexample
4286
4287Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4288operators.
73ae6183 4289
252b5132 4290@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4291@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4292@kindex SECTIONS
4293The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4294into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4295
4296The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4297@smallexample
4298SECTIONS
4299@{
4300 @var{sections-command}
4301 @var{sections-command}
4302 @dots{}
4303@}
4304@end smallexample
4305
4306Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4307
4308@itemize @bullet
4309@item
4310an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4311@item
4312a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4313@item
4314an output section description
4315@item
4316an overlay description
4317@end itemize
4318
4319The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4320@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4321those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4322understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4323the layout of the output file.
4324
4325Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4326below.
4327
4328If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4329linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4330section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4331input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4332example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4333in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4334
4335@menu
4336* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4337* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4338* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4339* Input Section:: Input section description
4340* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4341* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4342* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4343* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4344* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4345@end menu
4346
4347@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4348@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4349The full description of an output section looks like this:
4350@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4351@group
7e7d5768 4352@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4353 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4354 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4355 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4356 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4357 @{
4358 @var{output-section-command}
4359 @var{output-section-command}
4360 @dots{}
abc9061b 4361 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4362@end group
4363@end smallexample
4364
4365Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4366
4367The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4368name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4369The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4370the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4371The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4372
4373Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4374
4375@itemize @bullet
4376@item
4377a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4378@item
4379an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4380@item
4381data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4382@item
4383a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4384@end itemize
4385
4386@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4387@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4388@cindex name, section
4389@cindex section name
4390The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4391meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4392support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4393must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4394example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4395output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4396names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4397quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4398characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4399commas must be quoted.
4400
4401The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4402Discarding}.
4403
4404@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4405@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4406@cindex address, section
4407@cindex section address
4408The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4409address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4410is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4411
4412If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4413section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4414to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4415alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4416contained within the output section.
4417
4418The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4419
4420@itemize @bullet
4421@item
4422If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4423is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4424in that region.
4425
4426@item
4427If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4428regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4429section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4430be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4431
4432@item
4433If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4434the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4435counter.
4436@end itemize
4437
4438@noindent
4439For example:
4440
252b5132
RH
4441@smallexample
4442.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4443@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4444
252b5132
RH
4445@noindent
4446and
ea5cae92 4447
252b5132
RH
4448@smallexample
4449.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4450@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4451
252b5132
RH
4452@noindent
4453are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4454@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4455counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4456counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4457input sections.
252b5132
RH
4458
4459The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4460For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4461so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4462do something like this:
4463@smallexample
4464.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4465@end smallexample
4466@noindent
4467This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4468aligned upward to the specified value.
4469
4470Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4471location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4472sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4473
4474@node Input Section
36f63dca 4475@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4476@cindex input sections
4477@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4478The most common output section command is an input section description.
4479
4480The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4481You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4482in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4483map the input files into your memory layout.
4484
4485@menu
4486* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4487* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4488* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4489* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4490* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4491@end menu
4492
4493@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4494@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4495@cindex input section basics
4496An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4497by a list of section names in parentheses.
4498
4499The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4500describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4501
4502The most common input section description is to include all input
4503sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4504include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4505@smallexample
4506*(.text)
4507@end smallexample
4508@noindent
18625d54 4509Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4510@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4511of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4512match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4513example:
252b5132 4514@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4515EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4516@end smallexample
4517@noindent
4518will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4519and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4520placed inside the section list, for example:
4521@smallexample
b4346c09 4522*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4523@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4524@noindent
4525The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4526two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4527more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4528
4529There are two ways to include more than one section:
4530@smallexample
4531*(.text .rdata)
4532*(.text) *(.rdata)
4533@end smallexample
4534@noindent
4535The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4536@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4537first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4538they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4539@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4540@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4541
8f1732fc
AB
4542When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4543is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4544immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4545@smallexample
4546*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4547@end smallexample
4548@noindent
4549will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4550@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4551from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4552exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4553could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4554@smallexample
4555*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4556@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4557@noindent
4558Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4559before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4560all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4561@smallexample
4562EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4563@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4564
252b5132
RH
4565You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4566You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4567needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4568@smallexample
4569data.o(.data)
4570@end smallexample
4571
ae17ab41
CM
4572To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4573of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4574
4575Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4576
4577@smallexample
4578@group
4579SECTIONS @{
4580 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4581 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4582@}
4583@end group
4584@end smallexample
4585
4586In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4587input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4588@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4589@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4590whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4591
967928e9
AM
4592You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4593matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4594with no whitespace around the colon.
4595
4596@table @samp
4597@item archive:file
4598matches file within archive
4599@item archive:
4600matches the whole archive
4601@item :file
4602matches file but not one in an archive
4603@end table
4604
4605Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4606wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4607single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4608@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4609within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4610also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4611other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4612from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4613command.
4614
252b5132
RH
4615If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4616the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4617commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4618@smallexample
4619data.o
4620@end smallexample
4621
967928e9
AM
4622When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4623and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4624characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4625name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4626did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4627though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4628@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4629the archive search path.
4630
4631@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4632@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4633@cindex input section wildcards
4634@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4635@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4636@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4637In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4638name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4639
4640The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4641pattern for the file name.
4642
4643The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4644
4645@table @samp
4646@item *
4647matches any number of characters
4648@item ?
4649matches any single character
4650@item [@var{chars}]
4651matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4652character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4653@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4654@item \
4655quotes the following character
4656@end table
4657
4658When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4659will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4660Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4661exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4662@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4663a @samp{/} character.
4664
4665File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4666specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4667does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4668
4669If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4670appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4671will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4672sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4673@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4674@smallexample
4675.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4676.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4677@end smallexample
4678
bcaa7b3e 4679@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4680Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4681in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4682this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4683pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4684@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4685into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4686
bcaa7b3e 4687@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4688@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4689@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4690alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4691alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4692needed.
bcaa7b3e 4693
02ecc8e9 4694@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4695@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4696@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4697numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4698section name before placing them in the output file. In
4699@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4700the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4701@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4702
bcaa7b3e
L
4703@cindex SORT
4704@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4705
4706When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4707can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4708
4709@enumerate
4710@item
4711@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4712It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4713sections have the same name.
4714@item
4715@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4716It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4717sections have the same alignment.
4718@item
c0065db7 4719@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4720treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4721@item
4722@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4723is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4724@item
4725All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4726@end enumerate
4727
a05a5b64 4728When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4729section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4730takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4731
4732If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4733command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4734treated as nested sorting command.
4735
4736@enumerate
4737@item
4738@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4739@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4740@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4741@item
4742@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4743@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4744@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4745@end enumerate
4746
4747If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4748command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4749
eda680f8 4750@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4751@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4752section sorting option.
4753
252b5132
RH
4754If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4755@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4756precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4757
4758This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4759files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4760sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4761The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4762with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4763linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4764@smallexample
4765@group
4766SECTIONS @{
4767 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4768 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4769 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4770 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4771@}
4772@end group
4773@end smallexample
4774
4775@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4776@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4777@cindex common symbol placement
4778@cindex uninitialized data placement
4779A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4780file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4781linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4782named @samp{COMMON}.
4783
4784You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4785other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4786particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4787input files are placed in another section.
4788
4789In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4790@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4791@smallexample
4792.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4793@end smallexample
4794
4795@cindex scommon section
4796@cindex small common symbols
4797Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4798example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4799symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4800different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4801the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4802symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4803to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4804locations.
4805
4806@cindex [COMMON]
4807You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4808notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4809@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4810
4811@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4812@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4813@cindex KEEP
4814@cindex garbage collection
4815When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4816it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4817This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4818with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4819@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4820
4821@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4822@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4823The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4824to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4825start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4826@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4827follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4828@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4829@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4830All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4831files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4832
4833@smallexample
4834@group
4835SECTIONS @{
4836 outputa 0x10000 :
4837 @{
4838 all.o
4839 foo.o (.input1)
4840 @}
36f63dca
NC
4841@end group
4842@group
252b5132
RH
4843 outputb :
4844 @{
4845 foo.o (.input2)
4846 foo1.o (.input1)
4847 @}
36f63dca
NC
4848@end group
4849@group
252b5132
RH
4850 outputc :
4851 @{
4852 *(.input1)
4853 *(.input2)
4854 @}
4855@}
4856@end group
a1ab1d2a 4857@end smallexample
252b5132 4858
cbd0eecf
L
4859If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4860and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4861automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4862__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4863indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4864respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4865C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4866
252b5132 4867@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4868@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4869@cindex data
4870@cindex section data
4871@cindex output section data
4872@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4873@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4874@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4875@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4876@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4877You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4878@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4879an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4880parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4881value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4882counter.
4883
4884The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4885store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4886bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4887stored.
4888
4889For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4890of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4891@smallexample
4892BYTE(1)
4893LONG(addr)
4894@end smallexample
4895
4896When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4897same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4898target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4899@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4900@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4901
4902If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4903which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4904When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4905true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4906endianness of the first input object file.
4907
36f63dca 4908Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4909between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4910@smallexample
4911SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4912@end smallexample
4913whereas this will work:
4914@smallexample
4915SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4916@end smallexample
4917
252b5132
RH
4918@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4919@cindex holes, filling
4920@cindex unspecified memory
4921You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4922current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4923otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4924gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4925with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4926necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4927point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4928than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4929different parts of an output section.
4930
4931This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4932value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4933@smallexample
563e308f 4934FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4935@end smallexample
4936
4937The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4938section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4939part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4940entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4941precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4942expression.
252b5132
RH
4943
4944@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4945@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4946There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4947commands.
4948
4949@table @code
4950@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4951@cindex input filename symbols
4952@cindex filename symbols
4953@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4954The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4955The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4956file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4957the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4958
4959This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4960normally used for any other object file format.
4961
4962@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4963@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4964@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4965@item CONSTRUCTORS
4966When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4967unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4968destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4969arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4970automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4971For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4972linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4973@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4974ignored for other object file formats.
4975
4976The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4977constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4978Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4979the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4980first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4981of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4982compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4983formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4984@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4985the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4986destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4987@code{exit}.
4988
4989For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4990arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4991addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4992and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4993linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4994runtime code expects to see.
4995
4996@smallexample
4997 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4998 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4999 *(.ctors)
5000 LONG(0)
5001 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5002 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5003 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5004 *(.dtors)
5005 LONG(0)
5006 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5007@end smallexample
5008
5009If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5010which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5011are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5012are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
5013command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5014@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5015@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
5016@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5017
5018Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5019and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5020need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5021scripts.
5022
5023@end table
5024
5025@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 5026@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
5027@cindex discarding sections
5028@cindex sections, discarding
5029@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
5030The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5031This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5032may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 5033@smallexample
49c13adb 5034.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
5035@end smallexample
5036@noindent
5037will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
5038@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5039sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
5040space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5041too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5042space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5043@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5044@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5045This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5046
a0976ea4 5047The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5048on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5049symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5050the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5051section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5052
5053@cindex /DISCARD/
5054The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5055input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5056section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5057
a2e098c3
NC
5058Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5059discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5060members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5061Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5062
252b5132 5063@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5064@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5065@cindex output section attributes
5066We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5067like this:
0c71d759 5068
252b5132 5069@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5070@group
7e7d5768 5071@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5072 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5073 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5074 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5075 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5076 @{
5077 @var{output-section-command}
5078 @var{output-section-command}
5079 @dots{}
562d3460 5080 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5081@end group
5082@end smallexample
0c71d759 5083
252b5132
RH
5084We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5085@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5086remaining section attributes.
5087
a1ab1d2a 5088@menu
252b5132
RH
5089* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5090* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5091* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5092* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5093* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5094* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5095* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5096* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5097@end menu
5098
5099@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5100@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5101Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5102parentheses. The following types are defined:
5103
5104@table @code
5105@item NOLOAD
5106The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5107loaded into memory when the program is run.
5108@item DSECT
5109@itemx COPY
5110@itemx INFO
5111@itemx OVERLAY
5112These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5113rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5114marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5115section when the program is run.
5116@end table
5117
5118@kindex NOLOAD
5119@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5120@cindex loading, preventing
5121The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5122the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5123the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5124@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5125need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5126@smallexample
5127@group
5128SECTIONS @{
5129 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5130 @dots{}
5131@}
5132@end group
5133@end smallexample
5134
5135@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5136@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5137@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5138@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5139@cindex load address
5140@cindex section load address
5141Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5142@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5143@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5144specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5145address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5146
ea5cae92
NC
5147The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5148specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5149takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5150load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5151region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5152
5153If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5154section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5155load address:
5156
5157@itemize @bullet
5158@item
5159If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5160the LMA address as well.
5161
5162@item
5163If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5164
5165@item
5166Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5167with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5168section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5169VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5170the last section in the located region.
5171
5172@item
5173If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5174that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5175
5176@item
5177If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5178section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5179@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5180
5181@cindex ROM initialized data
5182@cindex initialized data in ROM
5183This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5184example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5185called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5186@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5187even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5188uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5189defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5190counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5191
5192@smallexample
5193@group
5194SECTIONS
5195 @{
5196 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5197 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5198 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5199 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5200 .bss 0x3000 :
5201 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5202@}
5203@end group
5204@end smallexample
5205
5206The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5207this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5208the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5209how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5210script.
5211
5212@smallexample
5213@group
5214extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5215char *src = &_etext;
5216char *dst = &_data;
5217
ea5cae92
NC
5218/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5219while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5220 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5221
ea5cae92 5222/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5223for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5224 *dst = 0;
5225@end group
5226@end smallexample
5227
bbf115d3
L
5228@node Forced Output Alignment
5229@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5230@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5231@cindex forcing output section alignment
5232@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5233You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5234alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5235intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5236
7e7d5768
AM
5237@node Forced Input Alignment
5238@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5239@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5240@cindex forcing input section alignment
5241@cindex input section alignment
5242You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5243SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5244sections, whether larger or smaller.
5245
0c71d759
NC
5246@node Output Section Constraint
5247@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5248@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5249@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5250@cindex constraints on output sections
5251You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5252of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5253read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5254@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5255
252b5132 5256@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5257@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5258@kindex >@var{region}
5259@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5260@cindex memory regions and sections
5261You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5262using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5263
5264Here is a simple example:
5265@smallexample
5266@group
5267MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5268SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5269@end group
5270@end smallexample
5271
5272@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5273@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5274@kindex :@var{phdr}
5275@cindex section, assigning to program header
5276@cindex program headers and sections
5277You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5278using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5279one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5280assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5281@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5282linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5283
5284Here is a simple example:
5285@smallexample
5286@group
5287PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5288SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5289@end group
5290@end smallexample
5291
5292@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5293@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5294@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5295@cindex section fill pattern
5296@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5297You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5298@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5299(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5300within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5301alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5302necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5303of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5304an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5305fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5306other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5307pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5308expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5309
5310You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5311output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5312
5313Here is a simple example:
5314@smallexample
5315@group
563e308f 5316SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5317@end group
5318@end smallexample
5319
5320@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5321@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5322@kindex OVERLAY
5323@cindex overlays
5324An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5325are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5326the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5327copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5328required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5329can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5330than another.
5331
5332Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5333@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5334output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5335command is as follows:
5336@smallexample
5337@group
5338OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5339 @{
5340 @var{secname1}
5341 @{
5342 @var{output-section-command}
5343 @var{output-section-command}
5344 @dots{}
5345 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5346 @var{secname2}
5347 @{
5348 @var{output-section-command}
5349 @var{output-section-command}
5350 @dots{}
5351 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5352 @dots{}
abc9061b 5353 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5354@end group
5355@end smallexample
5356
5357Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5358section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5359section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5360those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5361except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5362sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5363
abc9061b
CC
5364The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5365the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5366
252b5132
RH
5367The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5368addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5369memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5370whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5371and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5372and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5373
56dd11f0
NC
5374If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5375references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5376the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5377sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5378@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5379
5380For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5381provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5382defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5383@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5384the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5385within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5386symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5387
5388At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5389the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5390
5391Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5392@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5393@smallexample
5394@group
5395 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5396 @{
5397 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5398 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5399 @}
5400@end group
5401@end smallexample
5402@noindent
5403This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5404address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5405@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5406following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5407@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5408@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5409
5410C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5411like the following.
5412
5413@smallexample
5414@group
5415 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5416 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5417 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5418@end group
5419@end smallexample
5420
5421Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5422everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5423example could have been written identically as follows.
5424
5425@smallexample
5426@group
5427 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5428 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5429 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5430 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5431 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5432 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5433 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5434@end group
5435@end smallexample
5436
5437@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5438@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5439@kindex MEMORY
5440@cindex memory regions
5441@cindex regions of memory
5442@cindex allocating memory
5443@cindex discontinuous memory
5444The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5445memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5446
5447The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5448memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5449may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5450can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5451set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5452regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5453around to fit into the available regions.
5454
127fcdff
AB
5455A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5456however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5457specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5458@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5459@smallexample
5460@group
a1ab1d2a 5461MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5462 @{
5463 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5464 @dots{}
5465 @}
5466@end group
5467@end smallexample
5468
5469The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5470region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5471Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5472with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5473must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5474add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5475command.
252b5132
RH
5476
5477@cindex memory region attributes
5478The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5479whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5480not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5481@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5482section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5483the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5484them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5485
5486The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5487@table @samp
5488@item R
5489Read-only section
5490@item W
5491Read/write section
5492@item X
5493Executable section
5494@item A
5495Allocatable section
5496@item I
5497Initialized section
5498@item L
5499Same as @samp{I}
5500@item !
c09e9a8c 5501Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5502@end table
5503
81c688d5 5504If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5505@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5506attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5507unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5508not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5509string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5510or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5511the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5512
5513@kindex ORIGIN =
5514@kindex o =
5515@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5516The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5517the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5518cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5519abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5520@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5521
5522@kindex LENGTH =
5523@kindex len =
5524@kindex l =
5525The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5526region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5527be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5528@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5529
5530In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5531available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5532and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5533linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5534is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5535or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5536explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5537region.
5538
5539@smallexample
5540@group
a1ab1d2a 5541MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5542 @{
5543 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5544 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5545 @}
5546@end group
5547@end smallexample
5548
5549Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5550specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5551@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5552a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5553output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5554was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5555the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5556output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5557region, the linker will issue an error message.
5558
3ec57632 5559It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5560expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5561@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5562
5563@smallexample
5564@group
c0065db7 5565 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5566@end group
5567@end smallexample
5568
252b5132
RH
5569@node PHDRS
5570@section PHDRS Command
5571@kindex PHDRS
5572@cindex program headers
5573@cindex ELF program headers
5574@cindex program segments
5575@cindex segments, ELF
5576The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5577@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5578loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5579program with the @samp{-p} option.
5580
5581When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5582reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5583program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5584This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5585interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5586
5587The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5588in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5589precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5590the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5591not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5592
5593The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5594generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5595ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5596
5597This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5598@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5599
5600@smallexample
5601@group
5602PHDRS
5603@{
5604 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5605 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5606@}
5607@end group
5608@end smallexample
5609
5610The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5611of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5612header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5613with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5614must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5615is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5616
5617Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5618system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5619specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5620sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5621attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5622Section Phdr}.
5623
5624It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5625merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5626repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5627contain the section.
5628
5629If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5630then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5631not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5632convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5633placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5634default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5635segment at all.
5636
5637@kindex FILEHDR
5638@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5639You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5640the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5641The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5642file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5643include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5644segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5645these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5646
5647The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5648value of the keyword.
5649
5650@table @asis
5651@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5652Indicates an unused program header.
5653
5654@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5655Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5656the file.
5657
5658@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5659Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5660
5661@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5662Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5663found.
5664
5665@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5666Indicates a segment holding note information.
5667
5668@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5669A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5670ABI.
5671
5672@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5673Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5674
1a9ccd70
NC
5675@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5676Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5677
252b5132
RH
5678@item @var{expression}
5679An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5680be used for types not defined above.
5681@end table
5682
5683You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5684in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5685@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5686Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5687output section attribute.
5688
5689The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5690which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5691explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5692an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5693header.
5694
5695Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5696headers used on a native ELF system.
5697
5698@example
5699@group
5700PHDRS
5701@{
5702 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5703 interp PT_INTERP ;
5704 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5705 data PT_LOAD ;
5706 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5707@}
5708
5709SECTIONS
5710@{
5711 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5712 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5713 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5714 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5715 @dots{}
5716 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5717 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5718 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5719 @dots{}
5720@}
5721@end group
5722@end example
5723
5724@node VERSION
5725@section VERSION Command
5726@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5727@cindex symbol versions
5728@cindex version script
5729@cindex versions of symbols
5730The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5731only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5732symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5733a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5734shared library.
5735
5736You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5737you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5738also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5739
5740The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5741@smallexample
5742VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5743@end smallexample
5744
5745The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5746Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5747version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5748version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5749version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5750scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5751library.
5752
5753The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5754examples.
5755
5756@smallexample
5757VERS_1.1 @{
5758 global:
5759 foo1;
5760 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5761 old*;
5762 original*;
5763 new*;
252b5132
RH
5764@};
5765
5766VERS_1.2 @{
5767 foo2;
5768@} VERS_1.1;
5769
5770VERS_2.0 @{
5771 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5772 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5773 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5774 "f(int, double)";
5775 @};
252b5132
RH
5776@} VERS_1.2;
5777@end smallexample
5778
5779This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5780version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5781The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5782a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5783of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5784symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5785is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5786in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5787However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5788name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5789
5790Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5791depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5792to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5793
5794Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5795depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5796and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5797
5798When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5799specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5800unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5801unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5802somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5803wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5804wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5805set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5806ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5807
5808The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5809they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5810could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5811However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5812
0f6bf451 5813Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5814in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5815symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5816won't.
5817
5818@smallexample
7c9c73be 5819@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5820@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5821
252b5132
RH
5822When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5823symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5824requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5825shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5826loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5827linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5828application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5829way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5830all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5831search for each symbol reference.
5832
5833The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5834doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5835that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5836functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5837the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5838required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5839that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5840versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5841the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5842
5843There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5844first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5845source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5846script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5847maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5848@smallexample
5849__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5850@end smallexample
5851@noindent
5852in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5853be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5854The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5855@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5856takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5857
5858The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5859function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5860an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5861version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5862linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5863
5864To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5865source file. Here is an example:
5866
5867@smallexample
5868__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5869__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5870__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5871__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5872@end smallexample
5873
5874In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5875unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5876example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5877@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5878
5879When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5880some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5881this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5882@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5883declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5884you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5885
5886If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5887within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5888(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5889specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5890
cb840a31
L
5891You can also specify the language in the version script:
5892
5893@smallexample
5894VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5895@end smallexample
5896
c0065db7 5897The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5898The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5899demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5900patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5901@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5902
86043bbb
MM
5903Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5904described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5905or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5906the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5907whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5908cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5909might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5910should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5911expect when you upgrade.
5912
252b5132
RH
5913@node Expressions
5914@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5915@cindex expressions
5916@cindex arithmetic
5917The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5918that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5919expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5920host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5921
5922You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5923
5924The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5925expressions.
5926
5927@menu
5928* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5929* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5930* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5931* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5932* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5933* Operators:: Operators
5934* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5935* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5936* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5937@end menu
5938
5939@node Constants
5940@subsection Constants
5941@cindex integer notation
5942@cindex constants in linker scripts
5943All constants are integers.
5944
5945As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5946octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5947hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5948@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5949@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5950value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5951
5952@cindex scaled integers
5953@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5954@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5955@cindex suffixes for integers
5956@cindex integer suffixes
5957In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5958constant by
5959@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5960@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5961@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5962@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5963@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5964@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5965@tex
5966${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5967@end tex
5968@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5969respectively. For example, the following
5970all refer to the same quantity:
5971
252b5132 5972@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5973_fourk_1 = 4K;
5974_fourk_2 = 4096;
5975_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5976_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5977@end smallexample
5978
8a308ae8
NC
5979Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5980conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5981
0c71d759
NC
5982@node Symbolic Constants
5983@subsection Symbolic Constants
5984@cindex symbolic constants
5985@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5986It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5987the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5988
5989@table @code
5990@item MAXPAGESIZE
5991@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5992The target's maximum page size.
5993
5994@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5995@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5996The target's default page size.
5997@end table
5998
5999So for example:
6000
6001@smallexample
9d5777a3 6002 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
6003@end smallexample
6004
6005will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6006supported by the target.
6007
252b5132
RH
6008@node Symbols
6009@subsection Symbol Names
6010@cindex symbol names
6011@cindex names
6012@cindex quoted symbol names
6013@kindex "
6014Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6015and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6016Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6017specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6018keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6019@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
6020"SECTION" = 9;
6021"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
6022@end smallexample
6023
6024Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6025to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6026whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6027
ecca9871
L
6028@node Orphan Sections
6029@subsection Orphan Sections
6030@cindex orphan
6031Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6032are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6033script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
6034output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6035in which to place the orphaned input section.
6036
6037If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6038an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6039placed at the end of that output section.
6040
6041If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6042sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6043name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6044orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6045one new output section.
6046
6047If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6048then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6049in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6050linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6051attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6052sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6053support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6054
a05a5b64
TP
6055The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6056(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6057output sections an orphan is placed in.
6058
252b5132
RH
6059@node Location Counter
6060@subsection The Location Counter
6061@kindex .
6062@cindex dot
6063@cindex location counter
6064@cindex current output location
6065The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6066current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6067location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6068within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6069anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6070
6071@cindex holes
6072Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6073moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6074location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6075and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6076doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6077
6078@smallexample
6079SECTIONS
6080@{
6081 output :
6082 @{
6083 file1(.text)
6084 . = . + 1000;
6085 file2(.text)
6086 . += 1000;
6087 file3(.text)
563e308f 6088 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6089@}
6090@end smallexample
6091@noindent
6092In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6093located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6094followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6095@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6096@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6097specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6098
5c6bbab8
NC
6099@cindex dot inside sections
6100Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6101current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6102statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6103absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6104however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6105not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6106
6107@smallexample
6108SECTIONS
6109@{
6110 . = 0x100
6111 .text: @{
6112 *(.text)
6113 . = 0x200
6114 @}
6115 . = 0x500
6116 .data: @{
6117 *(.data)
6118 . += 0x600
6119 @}
6120@}
6121@end smallexample
6122
6123The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6124and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6125the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6126much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6127move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6128and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6129the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6130the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6131
b5666f2f
AM
6132@cindex dot outside sections
6133Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6134output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6135needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6136
6137@smallexample
6138SECTIONS
6139@{
6140 start_of_text = . ;
6141 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6142 end_of_text = . ;
6143
6144 start_of_data = . ;
6145 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6146 end_of_data = . ;
6147@}
6148@end smallexample
6149
6150If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6151not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6152between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6153should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6154blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6155the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6156sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6157statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6158special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6159place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6160as follows:
6161
6162@smallexample
6163SECTIONS
6164@{
6165 start_of_text = . ;
6166 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6167 end_of_text = . ;
6168
6169 start_of_data = . ;
6170 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6171 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6172 end_of_data = . ;
6173@}
6174@end smallexample
6175
6176This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6177@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6178placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6179assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6180a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6181section. So you could write:
6182
6183@smallexample
6184SECTIONS
6185@{
6186 start_of_text = . ;
6187 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6188 end_of_text = . ;
6189
6190 . = . ;
6191 start_of_data = . ;
6192 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6193 end_of_data = . ;
6194@}
6195@end smallexample
6196
6197Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6198@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6199
252b5132
RH
6200@need 2000
6201@node Operators
6202@subsection Operators
6203@cindex operators for arithmetic
6204@cindex arithmetic operators
6205@cindex precedence in expressions
6206The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6207the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6208@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6209@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6210@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6211@smallexample
6212precedence associativity Operators Notes
6213(highest)
62141 left ! - ~ (1)
62152 left * / %
62163 left + -
62174 left >> <<
62185 left == != > < <= >=
62196 left &
62207 left |
62218 left &&
62229 left ||
622310 right ? :
622411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6225(lowest)
6226@end smallexample
6227Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6228(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6229(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6230@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6231@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6232@tex
6233\vskip \baselineskip
6234%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6235\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6236\hrule
6237\halign
6238{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6239height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6240&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6241height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6242\noalign{\hrule}
6243height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6244&highest&&&&&\cr
6245% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6246&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6247&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6248&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6249&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6250&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6251&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6252&7&&left&&|&\cr
6253&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6254&9&&left&&||&\cr
6255&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6256&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6257&lowest&&&&&\cr
6258height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6259\hrule}
6260@end tex
6261@iftex
6262{
6263@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6264@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6265@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6266}
6267@end iftex
6268@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6269
6270@node Evaluation
6271@subsection Evaluation
6272@cindex lazy evaluation
6273@cindex expression evaluation order
6274The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6275an expression when absolutely necessary.
6276
6277The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6278address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6279regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6280as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6281
6282However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6283until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6284other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6285for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6286
6287The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6288assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6289allocation.
6290
6291Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6292@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6293
6294If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6295available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6296following
6297@smallexample
6298@group
6299SECTIONS
6300 @{
a1ab1d2a 6301 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6302 @{ *(.text) @}
6303 @}
6304@end group
6305@end smallexample
6306@noindent
6307will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6308address}.
6309
6310@node Expression Section
6311@subsection The Section of an Expression
6312@cindex expression sections
6313@cindex absolute expressions
6314@cindex relative expressions
6315@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6316@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6317@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6318Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6319relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6320using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6321value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6322symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6323operations.
6324
abf4be64
AM
6325Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6326section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6327address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6328@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6329functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6330One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6331(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6332differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6333versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6334section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6335Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6336absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6337given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6338everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6339
6340In the following simple example,
252b5132 6341
7542af2a
AM
6342@smallexample
6343@group
6344SECTIONS
6345 @{
6346 . = 0x100;
6347 __executable_start = 0x100;
6348 .data :
6349 @{
6350 . = 0x10;
6351 __data_start = 0x10;
6352 *(.data)
6353 @}
6354 @dots{}
6355 @}
6356@end group
6357@end smallexample
252b5132 6358
7542af2a
AM
6359both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6360address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6361@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6362section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6363
5c3049d2
AM
6364For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6365addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6366
6367@itemize @bullet
6368@item
c05f749e
AM
6369Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6370operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6371absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6372@item
7542af2a
AM
6373Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6374relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6375and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6376@item
c05f749e
AM
6377Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6378in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6379address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6380before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6381@end itemize
6382
6383The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6384
6385@itemize @bullet
6386@item
6387An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6388@item
6389The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6390@item
9bc8bb33 6391The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6392relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6393(after above conversions) is also a number when
6394@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6395but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6396@item
6397The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6398relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6399section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6400@item
6401The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6402conversions) is an absolute address.
6403@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6404
6405You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6406to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6407create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6408section @samp{.data}:
6409@smallexample
6410SECTIONS
6411 @{
6412 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6413 @}
6414@end smallexample
6415@noindent
6416If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6417@samp{.data} section.
6418
7542af2a
AM
6419Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6420particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6421
252b5132
RH
6422@node Builtin Functions
6423@subsection Builtin Functions
6424@cindex functions in expressions
6425The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6426use in linker script expressions.
6427
6428@table @code
6429@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6430@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6431@cindex expression, absolute
6432Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6433of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6434value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6435normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6436
6437@item ADDR(@var{section})
6438@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6439@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6440Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6441script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6442the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6443@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6444@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6445the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6446@smallexample
6447@group
6448SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6449 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6450 @{
252b5132
RH
6451 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6452 @dots{}
6453 @}
6454 .output :
6455 @{
6456 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6457 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6458 @}
6459@dots{} @}
6460@end group
6461@end smallexample
6462
876f4090
NS
6463@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6464@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6465@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6466@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6467@cindex round up location counter
6468@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6469@cindex round up expression
6470@cindex align expression
6471Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6472to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6473doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6474arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6475expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6476equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6477
6478Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6479next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6480variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6481input sections:
252b5132
RH
6482@smallexample
6483@group
6484SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6485 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6486 *(.data)
6487 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6488 @}
6489@dots{} @}
6490@end group
6491@end smallexample
6492@noindent
6493The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6494a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6495a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6496of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6497
6498The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6499
362c1d1a
NS
6500@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6501@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6502@cindex section alignment
6503Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6504been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6505evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6506the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6507value in that section.
6508@smallexample
6509@group
6510SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6511 .output @{
6512 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6513 @dots{}
6514 @}
6515@dots{} @}
6516@end group
6517@end smallexample
6518
252b5132
RH
6519@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6520@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6521This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6522scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6523section.
6524
2d20f7bf
JJ
6525@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6526@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6527This is equivalent to either
6528@smallexample
6529(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6530@end smallexample
6531or
6532@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6533(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6534 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6535@end smallexample
6536@noindent
6537depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6538for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6539@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6540If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6541memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6542bytes in the on-disk file.
6543
6544This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6545any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6546@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6547be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6548running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6549that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6550page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6551
6552@noindent
6553Example:
6554@smallexample
6555 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6556@end smallexample
6557
6558@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6559@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6560This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6561evaluation purposes.
6562
6563@smallexample
6564 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6565@end smallexample
6566
a4f5ad88
JJ
6567@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6568@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6569This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6570@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6571When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6572does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6573@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6574argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6575script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6576@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6577padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6578section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6579
6580@smallexample
6581 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6582@end smallexample
6583
252b5132
RH
6584@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6585@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6586@cindex symbol defaults
6587Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6588defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6589return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6590default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6591shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6592the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6593existed, its value is preserved:
6594
6595@smallexample
6596@group
6597SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6598 .text : @{
6599 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6600 @dots{}
6601 @}
6602 @dots{}
6603@}
6604@end group
6605@end smallexample
6606
3ec57632
NC
6607@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6608@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6609Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6610
252b5132
RH
6611@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6612@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6613@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6614Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6615Section LMA}).
6616
2e53f7d6
NC
6617@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6618@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6619Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6620@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6621
252b5132
RH
6622@kindex MAX
6623@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6624Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6625
6626@kindex MIN
6627@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6628Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6629
6630@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6631@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6632@cindex unallocated address, next
6633Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6634This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6635use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6636output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6637
3ec57632
NC
6638@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6639@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6640Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6641
ba916c8a
MM
6642@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6643@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6644Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6645value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6646@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6647will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6648can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6649``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6650name.
6651
252b5132
RH
6652@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6653@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6654@cindex section size
6655Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6656been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6657evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6658@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6659@smallexample
6660@group
6661SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6662 .output @{
6663 .start = . ;
6664 @dots{}
6665 .end = . ;
6666 @}
6667 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6668 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6669@dots{} @}
6670@end group
6671@end smallexample
6672
6673@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6674@itemx sizeof_headers
6675@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6676@cindex header size
6677Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6678information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6679this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6680choose, to facilitate paging.
6681
6682@cindex not enough room for program headers
6683@cindex program headers, not enough room
6684When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6685@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6686number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6687addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6688additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6689room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6690the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6691script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6692you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6693command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6694@end table
6695
6696@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6697@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6698@cindex implicit linker scripts
6699If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6700an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6701linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6702linker will report an error.
6703
6704An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6705
6706Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6707assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6708commands.
6709
6710Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6711at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6712read. This can affect archive searching.
6713
6714@ifset GENERIC
6715@node Machine Dependent
6716@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6717
6718@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6719@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6720sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6721functionality are not listed.
6722
6723@menu
36f63dca
NC
6724@ifset H8300
6725* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6726@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6727@ifset M68HC11
6728* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6729@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6730@ifset ARM
6731* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6732@end ifset
6733@ifset HPPA
6734* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6735@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6736@ifset M68K
6737* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6738@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6739@ifset MIPS
6740* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6741@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6742@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6743* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6744@end ifset
2469cfa2 6745@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6746* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6747@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6748@ifset NDS32
6749* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6750@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6751@ifset NIOSII
6752* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6753@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6754@ifset POWERPC
6755* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6756@end ifset
6757@ifset POWERPC64
6758* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6759@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6760@ifset S/390
6761* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6762@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6763@ifset SPU
6764* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6765@end ifset
74459f0e 6766@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6767* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6768@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6769@ifset WIN32
6770* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6771@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6772@ifset XTENSA
6773* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6774@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6775@end menu
6776@end ifset
6777
252b5132
RH
6778@ifset H8300
6779@ifclear GENERIC
6780@raisesections
6781@end ifclear
6782
6783@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6784@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6785
6786@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6787For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6788you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6789
6790@table @emph
6791@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6792@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6793@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6794targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6795program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6796respectively.
6797
6798@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6799@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6800@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6801@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6802sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6803page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6804(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6805@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6806top page of memory).
1502569c 6807
81f5558e
NC
6808@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6809indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6810displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6811the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6812@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6813whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6814range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6815
1502569c 6816@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6817@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6818biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6819which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6820page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6821(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6822@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6823the top page of memory).
6824
6825@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6826@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
682732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6828changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6829(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6830@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6831the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6832@end table
6833
6834@ifclear GENERIC
6835@lowersections
6836@end ifclear
6837@end ifset
6838
36f63dca 6839@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6840@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6841@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6842@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6843@node Renesas
6844@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6845
c2dcd04e
NC
6846@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6847H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6848options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6849@end ifset
6850@end ifclear
6851
36f63dca
NC
6852@ifset ARM
6853@ifclear GENERIC
6854@raisesections
6855@end ifclear
6856
93fd0973
SC
6857@ifset M68HC11
6858@ifclear GENERIC
6859@raisesections
6860@end ifclear
6861
6862@node M68HC11/68HC12
6863@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6864
6865@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6866
6867@subsection Linker Relaxation
6868
6869For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6870optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6871
6872@table @emph
6873@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6874@item relaxing address modes
6875@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6876targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6877program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6878respectively.
6879
6880@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6881transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6882page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6883
6884@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6885When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6886of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6887addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6888@code{bset} instructions.
6889
6890@end table
6891
6892@subsection Trampoline Generation
6893
6894@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6895@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6896For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6897call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6898will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6899trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6900case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6901point to the function trampoline.
6902
6903@ifclear GENERIC
6904@lowersections
6905@end ifclear
6906@end ifset
6907
36f63dca 6908@node ARM
3674e28a 6909@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6910
6911@cindex ARM interworking support
6912@kindex --support-old-code
6913For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6914between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6915been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6916line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6917libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6918option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6919given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6920which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6921the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6922non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6923
6924@cindex thumb entry point
6925@cindex entry point, thumb
6926@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6927The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6928@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6929But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6930branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6931executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6932
ce11ba6c
KT
6933@cindex PE import table prefixing
6934@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6935The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6936the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6937element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6938import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6939
e489d0ae
PB
6940@cindex BE8
6941@kindex --be8
6942The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6943executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6944objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6945option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6946little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6947
3674e28a
PB
6948@cindex TARGET1
6949@kindex --target1-rel
6950@kindex --target1-abs
6951The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6952@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6953or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6954and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6955
6956@cindex TARGET2
6957@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6958The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6959@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6960meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6961@table @samp
6962@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6963@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6964@item abs
6965@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6966@item got-rel
6967@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6968@end table
6969
319850b4
JB
6970@cindex FIX_V4BX
6971@kindex --fix-v4bx
6972The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6973specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6974interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6975also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6976
6977In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6978linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6979@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6980
6981In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6982relocations are ignored.
6983
845b51d6
PB
6984@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6985@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6986Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6987relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6988
6989@smallexample
6990TST rM, #1
6991MOVEQ PC, rM
6992BX Rn
6993@end smallexample
6994
6995This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6996and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6997condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6998
33bfe774
JB
6999@cindex USE_BLX
7000@kindex --use-blx
7001The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7002BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7003situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7004code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7005each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7006
7007This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7008specify it if you are using that target.
7009
c6dd86c6
JB
7010@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7011@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7012The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7013bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7014instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7015to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7016the support code can read the intended values.
7017
7018The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7019intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7020and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7021intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7022full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7023you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
7025If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7026enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7027@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7028mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7029vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7030@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7031
7032If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7033potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7034such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7035first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7036instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7037the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7038are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7039
2de70689
MGD
7040@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7041@kindex --fix-arm1176
7042@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7043The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7044in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7045are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7046unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7047
9d5777a3 7048Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7049Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7050http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7051
a504d23a
LA
7052@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7053@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7054
7055The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7056workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7057the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7058off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7059the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7060core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7061integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7062VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7063
7064The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7065necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7066
7067The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7068@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7069STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7070linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7071@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7072
7073If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7074potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7075such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7076replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7077branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7078then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7079
7080The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7081the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7082
7083The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7084they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7085there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7086occurs.
7087
7088The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7089PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7090large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7091cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7092occurs.
7093
bf21ed78
MS
7094@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7095@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7096The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7097warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7098enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7099linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7100using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7101not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7102
7103@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7104@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7105The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7106warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7107@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7108linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7109using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7110
726150b7
NC
7111@cindex PIC_VENEER
7112@kindex --pic-veneer
7113The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7114ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7115is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7116@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7117
7118@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7119@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7120The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7121code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7122perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7123placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7124controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7125The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7126duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7127group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7128code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7129where they should be placed.
7130
7131The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7132@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7133placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7134branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7135placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7136value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7137exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7138A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7139linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7140from the input sections.
7141
7142The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7143@samp{N = +1}.
7144
1a51c1a4
NC
7145Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7146only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7147otherwise.
7148
1db37fe6
YG
7149@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7150@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7151@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7152The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7153
7154The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7155
68fcca92
JW
7156@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7157@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7158@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7159The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7160
7161Please contact ARM for further details.
7162
1db37fe6
YG
7163@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7164@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7165@cindex Merging exidx entries
7166The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7167
7168@kindex --long-plt
7169@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7170The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7171which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7172entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7173
1f56df9d
JW
7174@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7175@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7176The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7177link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7178
4ba2ef8f
TP
7179@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7180All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7181Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7182@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7183veneers in memory.
7184
54ddd295
TP
7185@kindex --cmse-implib
7186@cindex Secure gateway import library
7187The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7188specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7189secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7190executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7191
0955507f
TP
7192@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7193@cindex Input import library
7194The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7195must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7196given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7197in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7198@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7199library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7200library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7201for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7202specified.
7203
36f63dca
NC
7204@ifclear GENERIC
7205@lowersections
7206@end ifclear
7207@end ifset
7208
7209@ifset HPPA
7210@ifclear GENERIC
7211@raisesections
7212@end ifclear
7213
7214@node HPPA ELF32
7215@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7216@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7217@kindex --multi-subspace
7218When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7219import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7220The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7221stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7222multiple sub-spaces.
7223
7224@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7225@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7226Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7227stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7228@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7229sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7230a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7231the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7232conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7233prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7234A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7235branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7236@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7237@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7238detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7239positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7240
7241Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7242single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7243create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7244large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7245
7246@ifclear GENERIC
7247@lowersections
7248@end ifclear
7249@end ifset
7250
7fb9f789
NC
7251@ifset M68K
7252@ifclear GENERIC
7253@raisesections
7254@end ifclear
7255
7256@node M68K
7257@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7258
7259@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7260@kindex --got=@var{type}
7261The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7262The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7263@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7264the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7265@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7266entries only at non-negative offsets.
7267@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7268entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7269support such GOTs.
7270@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7271output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7272file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7273files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7274
7275@ifclear GENERIC
7276@lowersections
7277@end ifclear
7278@end ifset
7279
833794fc
MR
7280@ifset MIPS
7281@ifclear GENERIC
7282@raisesections
7283@end ifclear
7284
7285@node MIPS
7286@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7287
7288@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7289@kindex --insn32
7290@kindex --no-insn32
7291The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7292microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7293in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7294used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7295or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7296including 16-bit ones where possible.
7297
8b10b0b3
MR
7298@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7299@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7300@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7301The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7302control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7303@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7304relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7305calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7306relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7307instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7308or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7309the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7310
833794fc
MR
7311@ifclear GENERIC
7312@lowersections
7313@end ifclear
7314@end ifset
7315
36f63dca
NC
7316@ifset MMIX
7317@ifclear GENERIC
7318@raisesections
7319@end ifclear
7320
7321@node MMIX
7322@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7323For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7324@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7325understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7326can translate between the two formats.
7327
7328There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7329Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7330registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7331equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7332@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7333global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7334this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7335symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7336
7a2de473
HPN
7337Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7338@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7339The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7340of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7341
7342Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7343are left out from an mmo file.
7344
7345@ifclear GENERIC
7346@lowersections
7347@end ifclear
7348@end ifset
7349
7350@ifset MSP430
7351@ifclear GENERIC
7352@raisesections
7353@end ifclear
7354
7355@node MSP430
7356@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7357For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7358will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7359just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7360
7361@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7362The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7363
7364@table @code
7365@item @samp{.vectors}
7366Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7367
7368@item @samp{.bootloader}
7369Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7370in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7371
7372@item @samp{.infomem}
7373Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7374this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7375
c0065db7 7376@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7377This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7378in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7379
7380@item @samp{.noinit}
7381Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7382
c0065db7 7383The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7384@end table
7385
7ef3addb
JL
7386@table @option
7387@cindex MSP430 Options
7388@kindex --code-region
7389@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7390This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7391argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7392using this option.
7393
7394@kindex --data-region
7395@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7396This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7397[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7398for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7399
7400@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7401@item --disable-sec-transformation
7402Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7403and @code{--data-region} options.
7404This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7405wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7406not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7407@end table
7408
36f63dca
NC
7409@ifclear GENERIC
7410@lowersections
7411@end ifclear
7412@end ifset
7413
35c08157
KLC
7414@ifset NDS32
7415@ifclear GENERIC
7416@raisesections
7417@end ifclear
7418
7419@node NDS32
7420@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7421@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7422For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7423relaxes objects according to these options.
7424
7425@table @code
7426@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7427Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7428
7429@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7430Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7431
7432@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7433Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7434
7435@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7436Export the EX9 table after linking.
7437
7438@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7439Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7440
7441@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7442Update the existing EX9 table.
7443
7444@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7445Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7446
7447@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7448Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7449
7450@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7451Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7452
7453@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7454Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7455@end table
7456
7457@ifclear GENERIC
7458@lowersections
7459@end ifclear
7460@end ifset
7461
78058a5e
SL
7462@ifset NIOSII
7463@ifclear GENERIC
7464@raisesections
7465@end ifclear
7466
7467@node Nios II
7468@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7469@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7470@kindex --relax on Nios II
7471
7472Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7473transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7474which may result in @command{ld} giving
7475@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7476The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7477trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7478outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7479trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7480be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7481larger than 256MB.
7482
7483The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7484is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7485@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7486locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7487source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7488register as a temporary.
7489
7490Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7491relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7492option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7493
7494@ifclear GENERIC
7495@lowersections
7496@end ifclear
7497@end ifset
7498
2a60a7a8
AM
7499@ifset POWERPC
7500@ifclear GENERIC
7501@raisesections
7502@end ifclear
7503
7504@node PowerPC ELF32
7505@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7506@cindex PowerPC long branches
7507@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7508Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7509displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7510@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7511@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7512the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7513section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7514section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7515@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7516both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7517considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7518
7519@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7520@table @option
7521@cindex PowerPC PLT
7522@kindex --bss-plt
7523@item --bss-plt
7524Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7525generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7526the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7527writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7528@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7529PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7530compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7531BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7532
016687f8
AM
7533@kindex --secure-plt
7534@item --secure-plt
7535@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7536@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7537when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7538layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7539style BSS PLT.
7540
2a60a7a8
AM
7541@cindex PowerPC GOT
7542@kindex --sdata-got
7543@item --sdata-got
7544The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7545sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7546@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7547section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7548@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7549@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7550@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7551@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7552PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7553pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7554GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7555really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7556
7557@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7558@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7559@item --emit-stub-syms
7560This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7561symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7562
7563@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7564@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7565@item --no-tls-optimize
7566PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7567sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7568disable the optimization.
7569@end table
7570
7571@ifclear GENERIC
7572@lowersections
7573@end ifclear
7574@end ifset
7575
7576@ifset POWERPC64
7577@ifclear GENERIC
7578@raisesections
7579@end ifclear
7580
7581@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7582@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7583
7584@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7585@table @option
7586@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7587@kindex --stub-group-size
7588@item --stub-group-size
7589Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7590by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7591@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7592sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7593a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7594the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7595conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7596prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7597A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7598branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7599@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7600@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7601detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7602positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7603
7604Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7605single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7606create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7607large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7608
7609@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7610@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7611@item --emit-stub-syms
7612This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7613symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7614
7615@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7616@kindex --dotsyms
7617@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7618@item --dotsyms
7619@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7620These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7621in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7622function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7623code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7624properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7625to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7626@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7627dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7628feature.
7629
7ae4ea7d
AM
7630@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7631@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7632@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7633@item --save-restore-funcs
7634@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7635These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7636provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7637@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7638function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7639link.
7640
2a60a7a8
AM
7641@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7642@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7643@item --no-tls-optimize
7644PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7645sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7646disable the optimization.
7647
7c9cf415
AM
7648@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7649@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7650@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7651@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7652@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7653@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7654@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7655These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7656stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7657an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7658@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7659stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7660generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7661__tls_get_addr_opt.
7662Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7663much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7664an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7665will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7666@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7667and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7668this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7669Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7670@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7671register saves.
7c9cf415 7672
2a60a7a8
AM
7673@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7674@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7675@item --no-opd-optimize
7676PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7677corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7678the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7679Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7680
7681@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7682@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7683@item --non-overlapping-opd
7684Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7685@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7686the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7687entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7688
7689@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7690@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7691@item --no-toc-optimize
7692PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7693entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7694reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7695marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7696marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7697relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7698unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7699reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7700discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7701reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7702code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7703optimization.
7704
7705@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7706@kindex --no-multi-toc
7707@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7708If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7709@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7710where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7711entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7712total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7713grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7714TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7715calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7716help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
771764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7718Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7719
7720@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7721@kindex --no-toc-sort
7722@item --no-toc-sort
7723By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7724happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7725placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7726with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7727referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7728@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7729results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7730off this feature.
7731
7732@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7733@kindex --plt-align
7734@kindex --no-plt-align
7735@item --plt-align
7736@itemx --no-plt-align
7737Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7738aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7739boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7740specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7741specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7742if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7743PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7744
7745@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7746@kindex --plt-static-chain
7747@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7748@item --plt-static-chain
7749@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7750Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7751chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7752chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7753
7754@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7755@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7756@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7757@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7758@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7759With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7760lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7761another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7762order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7763memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7764barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7765looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7766seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7767default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7768
7769@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7770@kindex --plt-localentry
7771@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7772@item --plt-localentry
7773@itemx --no-localentry
7774ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7775ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7776(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7777Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7778or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7779functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7780in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7781interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7782including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7783to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7784complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7785care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7786@end table
7787
7788@ifclear GENERIC
7789@lowersections
7790@end ifclear
7791@end ifset
7792
b4cbbe8f
AK
7793@ifset S/390
7794@ifclear GENERIC
7795@raisesections
7796@end ifclear
7797
7798@node S/390 ELF
7799@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7800
7801@cindex S/390 ELF options
7802@table @option
7803
7804@cindex S/390
7805@kindex --s390-pgste
7806@item --s390-pgste
7807This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7808segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7809binaries marked that way.
7810@end table
7811
7812@ifclear GENERIC
7813@lowersections
7814@end ifclear
7815@end ifset
7816
49fa1e15
AM
7817@ifset SPU
7818@ifclear GENERIC
7819@raisesections
7820@end ifclear
7821
7822@node SPU ELF
7823@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7824
7825@cindex SPU ELF options
7826@table @option
7827
7828@cindex SPU plugins
7829@kindex --plugin
7830@item --plugin
7831This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7832
7833@cindex SPU overlays
7834@kindex --no-overlays
7835@item --no-overlays
7836Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7837regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7838@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7839turns off all this special overlay handling.
7840
7841@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7842@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7843@item --emit-stub-syms
7844This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7845symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7846
7847@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7848@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7849@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7850This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7851function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7852on calls to non-overlay regions.
7853
7854@cindex SPU local store size
7855@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7856@item --local-store=lo:hi
7857@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7858the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7859range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7860
c0065db7 7861@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7862@kindex --stack-analysis
7863@item --stack-analysis
7864SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7865unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7866under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7867@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7868@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7869determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7870for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7871for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7872for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7873find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7874and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7875under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7876dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7877is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7878and calls will be given.
7879
c0065db7 7880@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7881@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7882@item --emit-stack-syms
7883This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7884in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7885These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7886functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7887functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7888such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7889The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7890@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7891@end table
7892
7893@ifclear GENERIC
7894@lowersections
7895@end ifclear
7896@end ifset
7897
36f63dca
NC
7898@ifset TICOFF
7899@ifclear GENERIC
7900@raisesections
7901@end ifclear
7902
7903@node TI COFF
7904@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7905@cindex TI COFF versions
7906@kindex --format=@var{version}
7907The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7908TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7909also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7910format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7911header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7912
7913@ifclear GENERIC
7914@lowersections
7915@end ifclear
7916@end ifset
7917
2ca22b03
NC
7918@ifset WIN32
7919@ifclear GENERIC
7920@raisesections
7921@end ifclear
7922
7923@node WIN32
7924@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7925
c0065db7 7926This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7927See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7928command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7929
7930@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7931@cindex import libraries
7932@item import libraries
69da35b5 7933The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7934libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7935regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7936archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7937support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7938@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7939
c0065db7
RM
7940@item exporting DLL symbols
7941@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7942The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7943
7944@table @emph
7945@item using auto-export functionality
7946@cindex using auto-export functionality
7947By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7948which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7949
0a5d968e
NC
7950@itemize
7951@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7952@item --exclude-symbols
7953@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7954@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7955@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7956@end itemize
7957
09e2aba4
DK
7958When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7959(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7960symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7961often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7962private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7963options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7964exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7965final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7966
7967If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7968command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7969if either of the following are true:
7970
7971@itemize
7972@item A DEF file is used.
7973@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7974@end itemize
dc8465bf 7975
c0065db7
RM
7976@item using a DEF file
7977@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7978Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7979an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7980exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7981name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7982command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7983
7984@example
7985gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7986@end example
7987
0a5d968e
NC
7988Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7989@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7990
dc8465bf
NC
7991Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7992
7993@example
4b5bd4e7 7994LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7995
7996EXPORTS
7997foo
7998bar
7999_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
8000another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8001var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
8002doo = foo == foo2
8003eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 8004@end example
dc8465bf 8005
7fcab871 8006This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
8007symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8008alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8009by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8010@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
8011@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8012export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8013in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8014symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 8015
6b31ad16
DS
8016The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8017name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8018the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8019
b45619c0
NC
8020When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8021library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 8022@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 8023executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
8024
8025With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8026specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 8027non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
8028
8029If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
8030or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8031filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 8032
4b5bd4e7
DS
8033The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8034
8035@example
8036EXPORTS
8037 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8038 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 8039 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 8040@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
8041
8042Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8043@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8044@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8045@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8046Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8047@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8048string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8049
8050The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8051
8052@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8053will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8054by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8055linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8056library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8057
8058@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8059The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8060the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8061@code{*_imp__foo}).
8062
8063@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8064well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8065read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8066variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8067the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8068extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8069application will behave unexpectedly.
8070
8071@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8072it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8073symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8074API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8075the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8076
4b5bd4e7
DS
8077See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8078other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8079
8080@cindex creating a DEF file
8081While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8082with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8083
8084@item Using decorations
8085@cindex Using decorations
8086Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8087itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8088declared as:
8089
8090@example
8091__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8092__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8093@end example
8094
8095All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8096any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8097this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8098the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8099
8100Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8101decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8102instead:
8103
8104@example
8105__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8106__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8107@end example
8108
c0065db7
RM
8109This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8110when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8111variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8112code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8113of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8114omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8115@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8116information.
c0065db7 8117@end table
dc8465bf 8118
2ca22b03
NC
8119@cindex automatic data imports
8120@item automatic data imports
8121The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8122by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8123compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8124issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8125code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8126c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8127initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8128decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8129platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8130command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8131The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8132suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8133trigger the feature's use.
8134
c0065db7 8135auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8136additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8137
c0065db7 8138"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8139documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8140
c0065db7
RM
8141The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8142occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8143One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8144below.
8145
8146@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8147For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8148object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8149offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8150field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8151in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8152without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8153The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8154references.
8155
c0065db7
RM
8156The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8157be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8158themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8159runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8160compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8161support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8162run without error on an older system.
8163
c0065db7
RM
8164@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8165enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8166
8167@cindex direct linking to a dll
8168@item direct linking to a dll
8169The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8170including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8171libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8172traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8173libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8174function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8175though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8176storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8177tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8178large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8179
c0065db7 8180Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8181@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8182of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8183perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8184select the dll instead of an import library.
8185
2ca22b03 8186
69da35b5
NC
8187For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8188to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8189
8190@example
45e948fe
NC
8191libxxx.dll.a
8192xxx.dll.a
8193libxxx.a
8194xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8195libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8196cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8197libxxx.dll
8198xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8199@end example
8200
69da35b5
NC
8201before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8202
c0065db7
RM
8203(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8204where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8205@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8206file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8207@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8208
c0065db7
RM
8209Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8210@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8211was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8212various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8213could coexist on the same machine.
8214
2ca22b03
NC
8215The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8216applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8217libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8218
8219@example
8220bin/
8221 cygxxx.dll
8222lib/
8223 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8224 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8225@end example
8226
c0065db7
RM
8227Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8228done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8229
82301. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8231@example
8232gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8233@end example
2ca22b03 8234
69da35b5
NC
8235However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8236(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8237@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8238not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8239
2ca22b03
NC
82402. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8241directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8242should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8243making the app/dll.
8244
8245@example
8246ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8247@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8248
8249Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8250
8251@example
8252gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8253@end example
69da35b5
NC
8254
8255This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8256perfectly legal
8257
8258@example
8259bin/
8260 cygxxx-5.dll
8261lib/
c0065db7 8262 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8263@end example
8264
dc8465bf 8265Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8266even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8267@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8268
8269Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8270wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8271
82721. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8273work with auto-imported data.
8274
dc8465bf
NC
82752. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8276import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8277symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8278for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8279possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8280
45e948fe
NC
82813. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8282critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8283in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8284stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8285
69da35b5 8286So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8287true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8288a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8289binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8290massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8291requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8292will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8293
c0065db7 8294@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8295@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8296@item adding additional names
8297Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8298A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8299exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8300when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8301import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8302
c0065db7 8303@example
dc8465bf
NC
8304LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8305
8306EXPORTS
c0065db7 8307foo
dc8465bf 8308_foo = foo
c0065db7 8309@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8310
8311The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8312
8313Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8314source code using the "weak" attribute:
8315
c0065db7
RM
8316@example
8317void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8318void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8319@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8320
8321See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8322symbols.
8323
8324@item renaming symbols
8325Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8326kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8327@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8328DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8329created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8330
c0065db7 8331@example
dc8465bf
NC
8332LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8333
8334EXPORTS
8335_foo = foo
c0065db7 8336@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8337
8338The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8339@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8340@end table
dc8465bf 8341
0a5d968e 8342Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8343unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8344If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8345@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8346that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8347@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8348renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8349to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8350the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8351In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8352which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8353
8354@cindex weak externals
8355@item weak externals
8356The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8357weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8358defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8359are three variants of weak externals:
8360@itemize
8361@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8362called lazy externals.
8363@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8364This form is not presently implemented.
8365@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8366implemented.
8367@end itemize
8368As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8369are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8370uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8371
8372@cindex aligned common symbols
8373@item aligned common symbols
8374As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8375desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8376the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8377carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8378by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8379tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8380but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8381warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8382
2ca22b03
NC
8383@end table
8384
8385@ifclear GENERIC
8386@lowersections
8387@end ifclear
8388@end ifset
8389
e0001a05
NC
8390@ifset XTENSA
8391@ifclear GENERIC
8392@raisesections
8393@end ifclear
8394
8395@node Xtensa
8396@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8397
8398@cindex Xtensa processors
8399The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8400@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8401specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8402keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8403example, with the command:
8404
8405@smallexample
8406SECTIONS
8407@{
8408 .text : @{
8409 *(.literal .text)
8410 @}
8411@}
8412@end smallexample
8413
8414@noindent
8415@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8416and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8417literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8418interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8419group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8420files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8421and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8422
43cd72b9 8423@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8424@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8425Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8426provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8427is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8428literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8429will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8430location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8431the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8432unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8433@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8434range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8435
8436For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8437to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8438instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8439instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8440instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8441@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8442hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8443By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8444switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8445density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8446instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8447performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8448linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8449a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8450
8451The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8452control the linker:
8453
8454@cindex Xtensa options
8455@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8456@item --size-opt
8457When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8458more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8459no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8460alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8461preserve the correctness of the code.
8462@end table
e0001a05
NC
8463
8464@ifclear GENERIC
8465@lowersections
8466@end ifclear
8467@end ifset
8468
252b5132
RH
8469@ifclear SingleFormat
8470@node BFD
8471@chapter BFD
8472
8473@cindex back end
8474@cindex object file management
8475@cindex object formats available
8476@kindex objdump -i
8477The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8478These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8479object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8480format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8481it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8482associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8483object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8484(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8485list all the formats available for your configuration.
8486
8487@cindex BFD requirements
8488@cindex requirements for BFD
8489As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8490several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8491BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8492formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8493been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8494BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8495may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8496
8497One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8498mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8499useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8500conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8501
8502@menu
8503* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8504@end menu
8505
8506@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8507@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8508@cindex opening object files
8509@include bfdsumm.texi
8510@end ifclear
8511
8512@node Reporting Bugs
8513@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8514@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8515@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8516
ff5dcc92 8517Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8518
8519Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8520it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8521to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8522work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8523@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8524
8525In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8526information that enables us to fix the bug.
8527
8528@menu
8529* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8530* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8531@end menu
8532
8533@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8534@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8535@cindex bug criteria
8536
8537If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8538
8539@itemize @bullet
8540@cindex fatal signal
8541@cindex linker crash
8542@cindex crash of linker
8543@item
8544If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8545@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8546
8547@cindex error on valid input
8548@item
ff5dcc92 8549If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8550
8551@cindex invalid input
8552@item
ff5dcc92 8553If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8554may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8555object files are correct.
8556
8557@item
8558If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8559improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8560@end itemize
8561
8562@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8563@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8564@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8565@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8566
8567A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8568products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8569recommend you contact that organization first.
8570
8571You can find contact information for many support companies and
8572individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8573distribution.
8574
ad22bfe8 8575@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8576Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8577@value{BUGURL}.
8578@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8579
8580The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8581@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8582fact or leave it out, state it!
8583
8584Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8585problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8586assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8587matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8588the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8589location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8590were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8591into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8592specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8593and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8594
8595Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8596the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8597on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8598
8599Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8600bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8601respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8602You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8603
8604To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8605
8606@itemize @bullet
8607@item
ff5dcc92 8608The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8609the @samp{--version} argument.
8610
8611Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8612the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8613
8614@item
ff5dcc92 8615Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8616patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8617
8618@item
8619The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8620version number.
8621
8622@item
ff5dcc92 8623What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8624``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8625
8626@item
8627The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8628observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8629list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8630sufficient.
8631
8632If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8633and then we might not encounter the bug.
8634
8635@item
8636A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8637bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8638provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8639bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8640state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8641requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8642we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8643attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8644
8645If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8646@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8647object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8648@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8649how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8650
8651@item
8652A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8653incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8654
ff5dcc92 8655Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8656will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8657not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8658a chance to make a mistake.
8659
8660Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8661say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8662copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8663C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8664and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8665fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8666you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8667any conclusion from our observations.
8668
8669@item
ff5dcc92 8670If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8671diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8672@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8673If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8674context, not by line number.
8675
8676The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8677sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8678@end itemize
8679
8680Here are some things that are not necessary:
8681
8682@itemize @bullet
8683@item
8684A description of the envelope of the bug.
8685
8686Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8687which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8688changes will not affect it.
8689
8690This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8691will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8692with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8693We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8694
8695Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8696of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8697output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8698less time, and so on.
8699
8700However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8701report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8702
8703@item
8704A patch for the bug.
8705
8706A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8707the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8708a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8709to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8710
ff5dcc92 8711Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8712construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8713through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8714able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8715fixed.
8716
8717And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8718patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8719help us to understand.
8720
8721@item
8722A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8723
8724Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8725things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8726@end itemize
8727
8728@node MRI
8729@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8730@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8731To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8732linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8733alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8734described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8735simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8736@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8737linker commands; these commands are described here.
8738
8739In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8740file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8741features to make use of them.
8742
8743You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8744@samp{-c} command-line option.
8745
8746Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8747command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8748blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8749MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8750issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8751
8752Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8753
8754You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8755lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8756The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8757
8758@table @code
8759@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8760@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8761@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8762Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8763the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8764@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8765your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8766script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8767commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8768input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8769@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8770
8771@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8772@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8773Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8774in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8775
8776@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8777
8778@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8779@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8780Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8781@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8782
8783@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8784@item BASE @var{expression}
8785Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8786absolute addresses) in the output file.
8787
8788@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8789@item CHIP @var{expression}
8790@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8791This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8792
8793@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8794@item END
8795This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8796
8797@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8798@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8799Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8800language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8801
8802@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8803@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8804Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8805@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8806
8807The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8808same line, with no change in its effect.
8809
8810@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8811@item LOAD @var{filename}
8812@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8813Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8814same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8815command line.
8816
8817@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8818@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8819@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8820MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8821option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8822
8823@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8824@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8825@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8826Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8827order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8828script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8829sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8830file, in the order specified.
8831
8832@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8833@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8834@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8835@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8836Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8837@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8838
8839@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8840@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8841@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8842@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8843You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8844specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8845If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8846@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8847@end table
8848
793c5807
NC
8849@node GNU Free Documentation License
8850@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8851@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8852
370b66a1
CD
8853@node LD Index
8854@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8855
8856@printindex cp
8857
8858@tex
7ca01ed9 8859% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8860% meantime:
8861\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8862\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8863\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8864\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8865\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8866\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8867\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8868\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8869\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8870% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8871@end tex
8872
252b5132 8873@bye